Anda di halaman 1dari 305

SERVICE MANUAL

Paper Reusable Device


e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301

Model: KH-1020/1021
Publish Date: May 2013
File No. SME120063D0
R120921M6604-TTEC
Ver04 F_2014-11
Trademarks
• Mylar is a registered trademark of DuPont Teijin Films U.S. Limited Partnership.
• Molykote is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
• FLOIL is a registered trademark of Kanto Kasei Ltd. CORPORATION.
• TopAccess is a trademark of Toshiba Tec Corporation.
• iCLASS is a trademark of HID Corporation.
• MIFARE is a trademark of Royal Philips Electronics.
• Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective
companies.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved


Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission
of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE FOR
e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
The installation and service shall be done by a qualified service
technician.

1. Transportation/Installation
- The equipment is quite heavy, and weighs approximately 45 kg (99.23 lb.), therefore pay full
attention when handling it.
- Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC 120 V / 12 A, 220-240 V / 8 A for its power source.
- The equipment must be grounded for safety.
- Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and
direct sunlight.
- To insure adequate working space for the operation, keep a minimum clearance of 30 cm (11.8")
on the left, 80 cm (31.5") on the right and 20 cm (7.9") on the rear.
- The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be accessible.
- Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over
it.

2. General Precautions at Service


- Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service (except for the service
should be done with the power turned ON).
- Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once
a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
- When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise
noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as
screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places.
- Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
- The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband
since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity.
Caution: Before using the wristband, unplug the power cable of the equipment and make sure
that there are no charged objects which are not insulated in the vicinity.
- Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the paper reusing unit.
- The high-voltage section (power supply unit) should not be touched since the electric charge
may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the power is turned OFF.
- Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g.
rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys and fans).
- Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath.
- When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections.
- Use designated jigs and tools.
- Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents.
- Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished.
- Be very careful to treat the touch panel gently and never hit it. Breaking the surface could cause
malfunctions.
- Do not leave plastic bags where children can get at them. This may cause an accident such as
suffocation if a child puts his/her head into a bag.
Plastic bags of options or service parts must be brought back.

3. General operations
- Check the procedures and perform them as described in the Service Manual.
- Make sure you do not lose your balance.
- Avoid exposure to your skin and wear protective gloves as needed.

4. Important Service Parts for Safety


- The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, batteries, IC-RAMs including
lithium batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly.
If these parts are short-circuited and their functions become ineffective, they may result in fatal
accidents such as explosion or burnout. Do not allow a short-circuit and do not use the parts not
recommended by Toshiba TEC Corporation.

5. Cautionary Labels
- During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as "Unplug the
power cable during service", "CAUTION. HOT", "CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE", etc. to see if there
is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the equipment.

[2]

[4]

[1]
[3]

[1] Rating plate


[2] Warning for high temperature area (Erase unit)
[3] Warning for high temperature area

6. Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies, Packing Materials, Used Batteries and IC-RAMs
including lithium batteries
- Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, used
batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries, follow the relevant local regulations or rules.

Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach
diesem Handbuch.
ALLEGEMEINE SICHERHEITSMASSNAHMEN IN BEZUG
AUF DIE WARTUNG FÜR e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
Die Installation und die Wartung sind von einem qualifizierten Service-
Techniker durchzuführen.

1. Transport/Installation
- Das Gerät ist sehr schwer und wiegt etwa 45 kg (99.23 lbs) deshalb muss bei der Handhabung
des Geräts besonders aufgepasst werden.
- Eine spezielle Steckdose mit Stromversorgung von AC 120 V / 12 A oder 220-240 V / 8 A als
Stromquelle verwenden.
- Das Gerät ist aus Sicherheitsgründen zu erden.
- Einen geeigneten Standort für die Installation wählen. Standorte mit zuviel Hitze, hoher
Luftfeuchtigkeit, Staub, Vibrieren und direkter Sonneneinstrahlung sind zu vermeiden.
- Um einen optimalen Kopierbetrieb zu gewährleisten, muss ein Abstand von mindestens 30 cm
links, 80 cm rechts und 20 cm dahinter eingehalten werden.
- Das Gerät ist in der Nähe der Steckdose zu installieren; diese muss leicht zu erreichen sein.
- Nach der Installation muss das Netzkabel richtig hineingesteckt und befestigt werden, damit
niemand darüber stolpern kann.

2. Allgemeine Sicherheitsmassnahmen in bezug auf die Wartung


- Während der Wartung das Gerät ausschalten und das Netzkabel herausziehen (ausser Wartung,
die bei einem eingeschalteten Gerät, durchgeführt werden muss).
- Das Netzkabel herausziehen und den Bereich um die Steckerpole und die Steckdose die
Umgebung in der Nähe von den Steckerzacken und der Steckdose wenigstens einmal im Jahr
reinigen. Wenn Staub sich in dieser Gegend ansammelt, kann dies ein Feuer verursachen.
- Wenn die Teile auseinandergenommen werden, wenn nicht anders in diesem Handbuch usw
erklärt, ist das Zusammenbauen in umgekehrter Reihenfolge durchzuführen. Aufpassen, dass
kleine Teile wie Schrauben, Dichtungsringe, Bolzen, E-Ringe, Stern-Dichtungsringe,
Kabelbäume nicht an den verkehrten Stellen eingebaut werden.
- Grundsätzlich darf das Gerät mit enfernten oder auseinandergenommenen Teilen nicht in
Betrieb genommen werden.
- Das PC-Board muss in einer Anti-elektrostatischen Hülle gelagert werden. Nur Mit einer
Manschette bei Betätigung eines Armbandes anfassen, sonst könnte es sein, dass die
integrierten Schaltkreise durch statische Elektrizität beschädigt werden.
Vorsicht: Vor Benutzung der Manschette der Betätigung des Armbandes, das Netzkabel
des Gerätes herausziehen und prüfen, dass es in der Nähe keine geladenen
Gegenstände, die nicht isoliert sind, gibt.
- Auf keinen Fall Hochtemperaturbereiche, wie die Belichtungslampe, die Fixiereinheit, die
Heizquelle und die umliegenden Bereiche, berühren.
- Auf keinen Fall Hochspannungsbereiche, wie die Ladeeinheiten, die Transferwalze, die
Entwicklereinheit, den Hochspannungstransformator, den Steuerumrichter fur die
Belichtungslampe, den Umrichter für die LCD-Hintergrundbeleuchtung und das Netzgerät,
berühren. Insbesondere sollten die Platinen dieser Komponenten nicht berührt werden, da die
Kondensatoren usw. auch nach dem Ausschalten des Geräts noch elektrisch geladen sein
können.
- Vor dem Berühren potenziell gefährlicher Bereiche (z. B. drehbare oder betriebsrelevante
Bereiche, wie Zahnräder, Riemen, Riemenscheiben und Lüfter) sicherstellen, dass das Gerät
sich nicht bedienen lässt.
- Beim Entfernen von Abdeckungen vorsichtig vorgehen, da sich darunter scharfkantige
Komponenten befinden können.
- Bei Wartungsarbeiten am eingeschalteten Gerät dürfen keine unter Strom stehenden, drehbaren
oder betriebsrelevanten Bereiche berührt werden.
- Ausschließlich vorgesehene Werkzeuge und Hilfsmittel verwenden.
- Empfohlene oder gleichwertige Messgeräte verwenden.
- Nach Abschluss der Wartungsarbeiten das Gerät in den ursprünglichen Zustand zurück
versetzen und den einwandfreien Betrieb überprüfen.
- Das berührungsempfindliche Bedienungsfeld stets vorsichtig handhaben und keinen Stößen
aussetzen. Wenn die Oberfläche beschädigt wird, kann dies zu Funktionsstörungen führen.
- Bewahren Sie Kunststofftuten kindersicher auf. Es besteht Erstickungsgefahr, wenn sich Kinder
beim Spielen eine Kunststofftute uber den Kopf ziehen. Bitte nehmen Sie die Kunststofftuten von
Optionen oder Serviceparts wieder zuruck.

3. Allgemeine Sicherheïtsmassnahmen
- Die Verfahren sind zu überprüfen und wie im Wartungshandbuch beschrieben durchzuführen.
- Vorsichtig, dass Sie nicht umfallen.
- Um Aussetzung zur Haut zur vermeiden, tragen Sie wenn nötig Schutzhandschuhe.

4. Sicherheitsrelevante Wartungsteile
- Der Leistungsschutzschalter, der Türschalter, die Sicherung, der Thermostat, die Ther-
mosicherung, der Thermistor, der Akkus, die IC-RAMs einschließlich der Lithiumakkus usw. sind
besonders sicherheitsrelevant. Sie müssen unbedingt korrekt gehandhabt und installiert werden.
Wenn diese Teile kurzgeschlossen und funktionsunfähig werden, kann dies zu schwerwieg-
enden Schäden, wie einer Explosion oder einem Abbrand, führen. Kurzschlüsse sind zu ver-
meiden, und es sind ausschließlich Teile zu verwenden, die von der Toshiba TEC Corporation
empfohlen sind.

5. Warnetiketten
- Im Rahmen der Wartung unbedingt das Leistungsschild und die Etiketten mit Warnhinweisen
überprüfen [z. B. „Unplug the power cable during service“ („Netzkabel vor Beginn der
Wartungsarbeiten abziehen“), „CAUTION. HOT“ („VORSICHT, HEISS“), „CAUTION. HIGH
VOLTAGE“ („VORSICHT, HOCHSPANNUNG“), usw.], um sicherzustellen, dass sie nicht
verschmutzt sind und korrekt am Gerät angebracht sind.

[2]

[4]

[1]
[3]

[1] Klassifizierungsetikett
[2] Warnung fur Bereiche mit hohen Temperaturen (Fixiereinheit)
[3] Warnung fur Bereiche mit hohen Temperaturen
6. Entsorgung des Geräts, der Verbrauchs- und Verpackungsmaterialien, alter Akkus und IC-
RAMs
- In Bezug auf die Entsorgung und Wiederverwertung des Geräts, der Verbrauchs- und
Verpackungsmaterialien, alter Akkus und IC-RAMs, einschließlich Lithiumakkus, sind die
einschlägigen nationalen oder regionalen Vorschriften zu befolgen.

Caution:
Dispose of used batteries and IC-RAMs including lithium batteries according to this manual.
Attention:
Se débarrasser de batteries et IC-RAMs usés y compris les batteries en lithium selon ce manuel.
Vorsicht:
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien und IC-RAMs (inclusive der Lithium-Batterie) nach
diesem Handbuch.
CONTENTS
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES ............................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Specifications....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Accessories ......................................................................................................................... 1-3
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION............................................................................................ 2-1
2.1 Sectional View ..................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Electric Parts Layout............................................................................................................ 2-4
2.2.1 Paper feeding section............................................................................................. 2-4
2.2.2 Scanning section .................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.3 Erase section.......................................................................................................... 2-6
2.2.4 PC board, Paper exit section.................................................................................. 2-7
2.3 Symbols and Functions of Various Components................................................................. 2-8
2.3.1 Motors .................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.3.2 Sensors and switches ............................................................................................ 2-8
2.3.3 Electromagnetic clutch ......................................................................................... 2-10
2.3.4 Solenoids.............................................................................................................. 2-10
2.3.5 PC boards ............................................................................................................ 2-11
2.3.6 Lamps................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.3.7 Thermistors and thermostats................................................................................ 2-11
2.3.8 Others................................................................................................................... 2-12
3. DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION.................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Control Panel ....................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 General description ................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Paper Feeding Section ........................................................................................................ 3-2
3.2.1 General descriptions .............................................................................................. 3-2
3.2.2 Composition ........................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.3 Functions................................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2.4 Operation................................................................................................................ 3-4
3.3 Paper Transport Section...................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.1 General description ................................................................................................ 3-5
3.3.2 Composition ........................................................................................................... 3-5
3.3.3 Functions................................................................................................................ 3-5
3.3.4 Operation................................................................................................................ 3-6
3.4 Scanning Section................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.4.1 General description ................................................................................................ 3-7
3.4.2 Composition ........................................................................................................... 3-8
3.4.3 Functions................................................................................................................ 3-8
3.4.4 Operation................................................................................................................ 3-8
3.5 Erase Section .................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.5.1 General description .............................................................................................. 3-10
3.5.2 Composition ......................................................................................................... 3-11
3.5.3 Functions.............................................................................................................. 3-11
3.5.4 Operation.............................................................................................................. 3-12
3.5.5 Control of the erase unit temperature / safety device........................................... 3-13
3.5.6 Heat control circuit................................................................................................ 3-13
3.6 Paper Exit Section ............................................................................................................. 3-15
3.6.1 General description .............................................................................................. 3-15
3.6.2 Composition ......................................................................................................... 3-16
3.6.3 Functions.............................................................................................................. 3-16
3.6.4 Operation.............................................................................................................. 3-17
3.7 Ink Printer .......................................................................................................................... 3-18
3.7.1 General description .............................................................................................. 3-18

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
CONTENTS
1
3.7.2 Functions.............................................................................................................. 3-18
4. DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION ........................................................................ 4-1
4.1 Cover ................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Front cover ............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.2 Upper cover............................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.3 Paper feed cover .................................................................................................... 4-4
4.1.4 Left upper cover ..................................................................................................... 4-6
4.1.5 Left center cover..................................................................................................... 4-7
4.1.6 Rear cover.............................................................................................................. 4-8
4.1.7 Upper rear cover .................................................................................................... 4-9
4.1.8 Left rear cover ........................................................................................................ 4-9
4.1.9 Right rear cover .................................................................................................... 4-10
4.1.10 Right lower cover.................................................................................................. 4-10
4.1.11 Right center cover ................................................................................................ 4-11
4.1.12 Right upper cover ................................................................................................. 4-12
4.1.13 Left lower cover .................................................................................................... 4-13
4.1.14 Handle .................................................................................................................. 4-15
4.2 Control Panel ..................................................................................................................... 4-16
4.2.1 Control panel board (OP board) ........................................................................... 4-16
4.2.2 LED board ............................................................................................................ 4-16
4.3 Paper Feeding Section ...................................................................................................... 4-17
4.3.1 Paper feeding unit ................................................................................................ 4-17
4.3.2 Separation roller ................................................................................................... 4-21
4.3.3 Pick-up roller movement motor (M3) .................................................................... 4-22
4.3.4 Pick-up roller home position sensor (S9) ............................................................. 4-23
4.3.5 Feed sensor (S4) / Front skew sensor (S5) / Rear skew sensor (S6) / Multi feed paper
sensor (S7) on the sending side............................................................................. 4-24
4.3.6 Multi feed paper sensor (S7) on the receiving side .............................................. 4-28
4.3.7 Feed tray paper sensor (S1) ................................................................................ 4-29
4.3.8 Front paper pull-up sensor (S2) ........................................................................... 4-29
4.3.9 Rear paper pull-up sensor (S3) ............................................................................ 4-30
4.3.10 Paper feed cover switch (SW1) ............................................................................ 4-30
4.3.11 Feed cover interlock switch (SW7) ....................................................................... 4-31
4.3.12 Registration sensor (S8)....................................................................................... 4-31
4.3.13 Registration roller ................................................................................................. 4-32
4.3.14 Feed motor (M1)................................................................................................... 4-34
4.3.15 Separation motor (M2) ......................................................................................... 4-35
4.4 Paper Transport Section.................................................................................................... 4-38
4.4.1 1st transport sensor (S14) .................................................................................... 4-38
4.4.2 1st transport roller ................................................................................................ 4-39
4.4.3 2nd transport sensor (S15)................................................................................... 4-40
4.4.4 2nd transport roller ............................................................................................... 4-41
4.4.5 3rd transport sensor (S18) ................................................................................... 4-42
4.4.6 Inner duct ............................................................................................................. 4-44
4.4.7 Heater cooling fan (F2)......................................................................................... 4-45
4.4.8 3rd transport roller ................................................................................................ 4-45
4.4.9 4th transport sensor (S19).................................................................................... 4-46
4.4.10 4th transport roller ................................................................................................ 4-47
4.4.11 Left center cover switch (SW3) ............................................................................ 4-49
4.4.12 Speed adjustment motor (M5) .............................................................................. 4-49
4.4.13 Heater gate solenoid (SOL1)................................................................................ 4-50
4.4.14 Cooling guide ....................................................................................................... 4-51
4.5 Scanning Section............................................................................................................... 4-53
4.5.1 Scanner entrance sensor (S10) ........................................................................... 4-53
4.5.2 Scanner entrance roller ........................................................................................ 4-54

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
CONTENTS
2
4.5.3 Scanner exit sensor (S11) .................................................................................... 4-55
4.5.4 Scanner exit roller ................................................................................................ 4-56
4.5.5 Scanner-1 (SCN1) ................................................................................................ 4-57
4.5.6 Scanner-2 (SCN2) ................................................................................................ 4-59
4.5.7 Scan motor (M4)................................................................................................... 4-61
4.5.8 Shading sheet ...................................................................................................... 4-62
4.5.9 Shading motor (M6).............................................................................................. 4-63
4.5.10 Shading sheet home position sensor (S13) ......................................................... 4-64
4.5.11 Left upper cover switch (SW2) ............................................................................. 4-64
4.6 Erase Section .................................................................................................................... 4-65
4.6.1 Erase unit ............................................................................................................. 4-65
4.6.2 Outside unit cover ................................................................................................ 4-66
4.6.3 Front side cover.................................................................................................... 4-66
4.6.4 Rear side cover .................................................................................................... 4-67
4.6.5 Heat roller-1.......................................................................................................... 4-68
4.6.6 Inside unit cover ................................................................................................... 4-69
4.6.7 Heat roller-1 lamp / Heat roller-2 lamp (LAMP1 / LAMP2) ................................... 4-70
4.6.8 Outside unit paper guide ...................................................................................... 4-73
4.6.9 Pressure roller-2 ................................................................................................... 4-74
4.6.10 Heat roller-2.......................................................................................................... 4-75
4.6.11 Inside unit paper guide ......................................................................................... 4-77
4.6.12 Pressure roller-1 ................................................................................................... 4-78
4.6.13 Heat roller-2 center thermistor (THMS3) / Heat roller-2 side thermistor (THMS4)4-79
4.6.14 Heat roller-2 center thermostat (THMO2)............................................................. 4-81
4.6.15 Inside unit separation finger ................................................................................. 4-82
4.6.16 Lower inside unit cover......................................................................................... 4-83
4.6.17 Outside unit separation fingers............................................................................. 4-84
4.6.18 Inside unit / Outside unit....................................................................................... 4-84
4.6.19 Drive gear unit ...................................................................................................... 4-86
4.6.20 Paper guide roller ................................................................................................. 4-87
4.6.21 Heat roller-1 center thermistor (THMS1) .............................................................. 4-87
4.6.22 Heat roller-1 side thermistor (THMS2) ................................................................. 4-88
4.6.23 Heat roller-1 center thermostat (THMO1)............................................................. 4-88
4.6.24 Erase unit entrance sensor (S16)......................................................................... 4-89
4.6.25 Erase unit exit sensor (S17) ................................................................................. 4-90
4.6.26 Right lower cover switch (SW4) ........................................................................... 4-91
4.6.27 Right upper cover switch (SW5) ........................................................................... 4-91
4.6.28 Paper cooling fan-1 (F1)....................................................................................... 4-92
4.6.29 Scanner cooling fan (F3) ...................................................................................... 4-93
4.6.30 Erase unit motor (M7)........................................................................................... 4-93
4.6.31 Heater transport clutch (CLT1) ............................................................................. 4-95
4.7 Paper Exit Section ............................................................................................................. 4-97
4.7.1 Exit path sensor (S12) .......................................................................................... 4-97
4.7.2 Exit path roller ...................................................................................................... 4-98
4.7.3 Reuse drawer aligning roller lift motor (M9) ......................................................... 4-99
4.7.4 Reuse drawer aligning roller position sensor (S27)............................................ 4-101
4.7.5 Reuse drawer sensor (S24) ............................................................................... 4-103
4.7.6 Reuse drawer exit roller ..................................................................................... 4-104
4.7.7 Reuse drawer exit motor (M8) ............................................................................ 4-106
4.7.8 Drawer base metal plate .................................................................................... 4-107
4.7.9 Sensor holder ..................................................................................................... 4-109
4.7.10 5th transport sensor ........................................................................................... 4-109
4.7.11 5th transport roller .............................................................................................. 4-110
4.7.12 6th transport sensor (S26).................................................................................. 4-111
4.7.13 Reject drawer sensor (S25)................................................................................ 4-112

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
CONTENTS
3
4.7.14 Reject drawer paper full sensor (S23) ................................................................ 4-112
4.7.15 Reject drawer exit roller...................................................................................... 4-113
4.7.16 Reject drawer gate solenoid (SOL2) .................................................................. 4-115
4.7.17 Left lower cover switch (SW6) ............................................................................ 4-116
4.7.18 Reuse drawer aligning roller............................................................................... 4-116
4.7.19 Reuse drawer paper full sensor (S21) / Reuse drawer entrance sensor (S20).. 4-121
4.7.20 Reuse drawer ..................................................................................................... 4-125
4.7.21 Reject drawer ..................................................................................................... 4-125
4.8 Ink printer......................................................................................................................... 4-126
4.8.1 Ink printer board ................................................................................................. 4-126
4.8.2 Ink pad................................................................................................................ 4-127
5. SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES .......................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Input/output check test ........................................................................................................ 5-2
5.3 Adjustment........................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.4 Setting ............................................................................................................................... 5-19
5.5 Log output / adjustment value saving mode ...................................................................... 5-23
6. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 6-1
6.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................. 6-1
6.1.1 General Description................................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Preventive Maintenance Checklist....................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 Storage of Supplies and Replacement Parts....................................................................... 6-3
7. ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................... 7-1
7.1 General Description ............................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1.1 If a problem continues even after performing all troubleshooting........................... 7-1
7.1.2 Collection of debug logs with a USB device ........................................................... 7-2
7.2 Error Code List..................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.2.1 Alert ........................................................................................................................ 7-4
7.2.2 Jam......................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.3 Error ....................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.2.4 File sharing related error ...................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.5 System error......................................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.6 Access related error ............................................................................................. 7-11
7.2.7 Maintenance error ................................................................................................ 7-12
7.2.8 Network error........................................................................................................ 7-13
7.3 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ............................................................... 7-14
7.3.1 Check item ........................................................................................................... 7-14
7.3.2 Alert ...................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.3.3 Jam....................................................................................................................... 7-22
7.3.4 Error ..................................................................................................................... 7-47
7.3.5 File sharing related error ...................................................................................... 7-58
7.3.6 System error......................................................................................................... 7-63
7.3.7 Access related error ............................................................................................. 7-70
7.3.8 Maintenance error ................................................................................................ 7-70
7.3.9 Network error........................................................................................................ 7-74
7.4 Other troubleshooting ........................................................................................................ 7-77
7.4.1 Troubleshooting for the scanning image .............................................................. 7-77
7.4.2 Abnormal noise .................................................................................................... 7-77
7.4.3 Ink printer position ................................................................................................ 7-78
7.4.4 Adjustment of Erase unit ..................................................................................... 7-81
8. REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/SSD ...................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Installation and Replacement of PC boards ........................................................................ 8-1
8.1.1 Board case ............................................................................................................. 8-1

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
CONTENTS
4
8.1.2 SYS control board (SYS board) ............................................................................. 8-1
8.1.3 Scanner board (SCAN board) ................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.4 Main board (MAIN board) ....................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.5 Power supply board (PWR board).......................................................................... 8-3
8.1.6 Power supply board case ....................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.7 SYS board cooling fan (F4) .................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.8 SSD (SSD) ............................................................................................................. 8-4
8.1.9 Power supply fan (F5) ............................................................................................ 8-5
8.2 Precautions and Procedures for Replacing PC Boards and SSD ....................................... 8-6
8.2.1 Procedures when replacing the SSD ..................................................................... 8-6
8.2.2 Procedures when replacing the SYS board ........................................................... 8-6
8.2.3 Procedures when replacing the MAIN board.......................................................... 8-6
8.2.4 Procedures when replacing the scanner board ...................................................... 8-7
8.3 Precautions when disposing of the equipment .................................................................... 8-8
9. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Firmware Updating with USB Device................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 Firmware type and data file name for updating ...................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Precaution for a USB device .................................................................................. 9-2
9.1.3 Update Procedure .................................................................................................. 9-3
10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION................................................................................ 10-1
10.1 AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 DC Wire Harness............................................................................................................... 10-2

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
CONTENTS
5
e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
CONTENTS
6
1. SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES
1

1.1 Specifications
• Type Console type

• Paper feeding Feed tray (with an original glass and separation rollers, the center
used as guide to place originals)

• Erasing system Duplex heating system with double heat rollers

• Heat source for erase unit Halogen lamp

• Scanning sensor CCD line sensor

• Scanning light source LED lamp array

• Paper supply Stack height 15 mm (0.6") or lower, equivalent to 125 sheets of


paper with ink once erased; 64 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond)

• Paper size LT-R, ST-R (not supporting non-standard sizes): NAD


Paper size A4-R, A5-R, B-5R (not supporting non-standard sizes)
: MJD, AUD, ASD

• Paper type Plain paper (OHP films, postcards, envelopes, labels, tab paper are
not available)

• Paper weight 64 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond to 21 lb. Bond)

• Default number of reuse 6 for single printing, 4 for duplex printing

• Paper exit Separation exit to reuse and reject drawers (Drawer stack system
using the exit rollers)

• Exit capacity Reuse drawer


Stack height: 41.8 mm (1.91") or lower,

equivalent to 450 sheets of paper with toner once erased;


64 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond),
equivalent to 400 sheets of paper with toner once erased;
75 g/m2 (20 lb. Bond),
equivalent to 400 sheets of paper with toner once erased;
80 g/m2 (21.3 lb. Bond)

Reject drawer
Stack height: 10 mm (0.55") or lower,

equivalent to 120 sheets of paper with toner once erased;


64 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond),
equivalent to 100 sheets of paper with toner once erased;
75 g/m2 (20 lb. Bond),
equivalent to 100 sheets of paper with toner once erased;
80 g/m2 (21.3 lb. Bond)

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES
1-1
• Warm-up time 40 seconds +/- 10%

• Power requirements AC 120 V (+/- 10%), AC 220-240 V (+/- 10%)

• Rated frequency 50/60 Hz (common)

• Rated current 12 A (120 V series), 8 A (200 V series)

• Power consumption In operation: 1.5 kW or less

• Dimensions of the equipment W 470 x D 470 x H 825 (mm)

• Weight Approx. 45 kg (99.23 lbs)

• PM parts Erase unit (270,000 sheets)

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES
1-2
1.2 Accessories
1
Operator's manual User Guide

CD-ROM User Document CD: 1 pc.

Power cable 1 pc.

Rubber cap 4 pcs.

Reuse drawer label 1 pc.

Paper size stopper 1 pc. (NAD)

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES
1-3
e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SPECIFICATIONS/ACCESSORIES
1-4
2. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

2.1 Sectional View


2

F3 F1

A3 A2
F2
A1 F10
F9
E6
F4
B1
A6 E4
E7 E5
E1 A7
E2 D5
D2
F5
D6
A5
D1
D3
C1
A4 D4
F7
F6 F8

C2
F11 A9
F12
F13
A8

E8
F14

Fig. 2-1

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2-1
G9 G6 G4 G5 G10 G11 G1 H5
G3
G2

G7

H1
G8 G23
G15 G25
G16 G22
G12
G21
G13 I2
G17 H3
I1
H4
G20
G18
G24
G14 G19
G27 G33
G34
G26
H2
G30
G28
G29
G32

G31

Fig. 2-2

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2-2
A1 Feed motor G1 Feed tray paper sensor
A2 Separation motor G2 Front paper pull-up sensor
A3 Pick-up roller movement motor G3 Rear paper pull-up sensor
2
A4 Scan motor G4 Feed sensor
A5 Speed adjustment motor G5 Front skew sensor
A6 Shading motor G6 Rear skew sensor
A7 Erase unit motor G7 Multi feed paper sensor
A8 Reuse drawer exit motor G8 Registration sensor
A9 Reuse drawer aligning roller lift motor G9 Pick-up roller home position sensor
B1 Heater transport clutch G10 Feed cover switch
C1 Heater gate solenoid G11 Feed cover interlock switch
C2 Reject drawer gate solenoid G12 Scanner entrance sensor
D1 Heat roller-1 center thermostat G13 Scanner exit sensor
D2 Heat roller-2 center thermostat G14 Exit path sensor
D3 Heat roller-1 center thermistor G15 Shading sheet home position sensor
D4 Heat roller-1 side thermistor G16 Left upper cover switch
D5 Heat roller-2 center thermistor G17 Left center cover switch
D6 Heat roller-2 side thermistor G18 1st transport sensor
E1 Scanner-1 G19 2nd transport sensor
E2 Scanner-2 G20 Erase unit entrance sensor
E3 Ink printer G21 Erase unit exit sensor
E4 Paper cooling fan-1 G22 3rd transport sensor
E5 Heater cooling fan G23 4th transport sensor
E6 Paper cooling fan-3 G24 Right lower cover switch
E7 SYS board cooling fan G25 Right upper cover switch
E8 Power supply fan G26 Reuse drawer entrance sensor
F1 Pick-up roller G27 Reuse drawer paper full sensor
F2 Registration roller G28 5th transport sensor
F3 Separation roller G29 Reject drawer paper full sensor
F4 Scanner entrance roller G30 Reuse drawer sensor
F5 Scanner exit roller G31 Reject drawer sensor
F6 Exit path roller G32 6th transport sensor
F7 1st transport roller G33 Reuse drawer aligning roller position
sensor
F8 2nd transport roller G34 Left lower cover switch
F9 3rd transport roller H1 System control board
F10 4th transport roller H2 Power supply board
F11 Reuse drawer exit roller H3 Main board
F12 Reuse drawer aligning roller H4 Scanner board
F13 5th transport roller H5 Control panel board
F14 Reject drawer exit roller I1 Heater lamp-1
I2 Heater lamp-2

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2-3
2.2 Electric Parts Layout

2.2.1 Paper feeding section

M2
S9
S6 SW7
S3
S4
S1
SW1
M3
S2
M1

S5

S7
S8

Fig. 2-3

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2-4
2.2.2 Scanning section

S13

S10
M6
SW8
M4
S11

M5 SW9

SCN2 S12

SCN1

Fig. 2-4

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2-5
2.2.3 Erase section

SW5
SW4
S18
S19

F1
F2

CLT1 S17
THMO2
F4
THMS3
M7 THMO1
THMS1
THMS4
SOL1 LAMP2
F3 THMS2
LAMP1
S16

S15
S14

Fig. 2-5

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2-6
2.2.4 PC board, Paper exit section

SSD MAIN SW11


2
SYS OPB

LED

SW2
SW10

SCNB
SW3
PRT
PS

S27
M9
SW12 S21
SW6
S24
S20
F5
M8
SOL2
S25

S22
S23

S26

Fig. 2-6

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2-7
2.3 Symbols and Functions of Various Components
The column "P-I" shows the page and item number in the parts list.

2.3.1 Motors

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

M1 FEED-MOT Driving the pick-up roller, feed roller Fig. 2-3 7-13
Feed motor and registration roller
M2 SEPA-MOT Driving the separation roller Fig. 2-3 7-31
Separation motor

M3 PU-RLR-MOT Moving the pick-up roller up/down Fig. 2-3 3-21


Pick-up roller movement
motor

M4 SCAN-MOT Transporting paper in the scanning Fig. 2-4 21-24


Scan motor section

M5 SPD-AJT-MOT Driving the paper transport roller from Fig. 2-4 21-23
Speed adjustment motor the scanning section to the erase sec-
tion

M6 SHAD-MOT Moving the shading plate Fig. 2-4 21-23


Shading motor

M7 ERAS-MOT Driving the erase unit and transporting Fig. 2-5 21-21
Erase unit motor paper

M8 REUS-EXIT-MOT Transporting paper to the reuse drawer Fig. 2-6 32-27


Reuse drawer exit motor

M9 REUS-ALIGN-RLR-MOT Moving up/down the reuse drawer Fig. 2-6 34-8


Reuse drawer aligning roller aligning roller
lift motor

2.3.2 Sensors and switches

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

S1 FEED-TRAY-SNR Detecting paper presence/absence of Fig. 2-3 6-16


Feed tray paper sensor the feed tray

S2 F-PU-SNR Detecting paper pull-up (detecting sta- Fig. 2-3 6-4


Front paper pull-up sensor pled sheets of paper)

S3 R-PU-SNR Detecting paper pull-up (detecting sta- Fig. 2-3 6-4


Rear paper pull-up sensor pled sheets of paper)

S4 FEED-SNR Detecting paper in the paper feeding Fig. 2-3 4-27


Feed sensor section

S5 F-SKEW-SNR Detecting paper skew in the paper Fig. 2-3 4-27


Front skew sensor feeding section

S6 R-SKEW-SNR Detecting paper skew in the paper Fig. 2-3 4-27


Rear skew sensor feeding section

S7 MUL-FEED-SNR Detecting multiple paper feeding Fig. 2-3 4-30


Multi feed paper sensor 6-10

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2-8
Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

S8 RGST-SNR Detecting paper transport in the regis- Fig. 2-3 6-16


Registration sensor tration roller

S9 PU-RLR-HOME-SNR Detecting the home position of the pick- Fig. 2-3 3-11
2
Pick-up roller home position up roller
sensor

S10 SCN-ENT-SNR Controlling scan timing in the scanning Fig. 2-4 12-18
Scanner entrance sensor section

S11 SCN-EXIT-SNR Controlling switch timing of the trans- Fig. 2-4 13-9
Scanner exit sensor port path

S12 EXIT-PATH-SNR Detecting paper at the transport path to Fig. 2-4 13-9
Exit path sensor the paper exit section

S13 SHAD-SHT-HOME-SNR Detecting the home position of the Fig. 2-4 19-19
Shading sheet home position shading sheet
sensor

S14 1ST-TRANS-SNR Detecting scanned paper (for short-size Fig. 2-5 17-8
1st transport sensor paper)

S15 2ND-TRANS-SNR Detecting scanned paper Fig. 2-5 17-8


2nd transport sensor

S16 ERAS-ENT-SNR Detecting paper at the erase unit Fig. 2-5 17-8
Erase unit entrance sensor entrance

S17 ERAS-EXIT-SNR Detecting paper at the erase unit exit Fig. 2-5 17-6
Erase unit exit sensor

S18 3RD-TRANS-SNR Detecting paper before images are Fig. 2-5 16-19
3rd transport sensor erased

S19 4TH-TRANS-SNR Detecting paper after images are Fig. 2-5 16-19
4th transport sensor erased (for short-size paper)

S20 REUS-ENT-SNR Detecting paper at the reuse drawer Fig. 2-6 29-16
Reuse drawer entrance sen- entrance
sor

S21 REUS-FULL-SNR Detecting paper-full of the reuse Fig. 2-6 29-14


Reuse drawer paper full sen- drawer
sor

S22 5TH-TRANS-SNR Detecting paper at the transport path to Fig. 2-6 32-26
5th transport sensor the reject drawer

S23 REJE-FULL-SNR Detecting paper-full of the reject drawer Fig. 2-6 32-25
Reject drawer paper full sen-
sor

S24 REUS-SNR Detecting installation of the reuse Fig. 2-6 34-15


Reuse drawer sensor drawer
S25 REJE-SNR Detecting installation of the reject Fig. 2-6 34-15
Reject drawer sensor drawer

S26 6TH-TRANS-SNR Detecting paper at the transport path to Fig. 2-6 32-26
6th transport sensor the reject drawer

S27 REUS-ALIGN-RLR-SNR Detecting the position of the aligning Fig. 2-6 34-15
Reuse drawer aligning roller roller
position sensor

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2-9
Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

SW1 FEED-COV-SW Detecting opening/closing of the feed Fig. 2-3 8-5


Paper feed cover switch cover

SW2 LEFT-U-COV-SW Detecting opening/closing of the left Fig. 2-4 21-39


Left upper cover switch upper cover

SW3 LEFT-C-COV-SW Detecting opening/closing of the left Fig. 2-4 21-39


Left center cover switch center cover

SW4 RIGHT-L-COV-SW Detecting opening/closing of the right Fig. 2-5 19-8


Right lower cover switch lower cover

SW5 RIGHT-U-COV-SW Detecting opening/closing of the right Fig. 2-5 15-15


Right upper cover switch upper cover

SW6 LEFT-L-COV-SW Detecting opening/closing of the left Fig. 2-6 28-20


Left lower cover switch lower cover

SW7 FEED-COV-IL-SW Supplying or shutting off AC power Fig. 2-3 7-4


Feed cover interlock switch according to the opening/closing state
of the feed cover (Cover open: Shut off)

SW8 LEFT-U-COV-IL-SW Supplying or shutting off AC power Fig. 2-6 15-15


Left upper cover interlock according to the opening/closing state
switch (for shutting off the 24 of the left upper cover
V power supply)

SW9 LEFT-C-COV-IL-SW Supplying or shutting off AC power Fig. 2-6 15-15


Left center cover interlock according to the opening/closing state
switch of the left center cover

SW10 RIGHT-L-COV-IL-SW Supplying or shutting off AC power Fig. 2-6 19-4


Right lower cover interlock according to the opening/closing state
switch of the right lower cover

SW11 RIGHT-U-COV-IL-SW Supplying or shutting off AC power Fig. 2-6 21-39


Right upper cover interlock according to the opening/closing state
switch of the right upper cover
SW12 LEFT-L-COV-IL-SW Supplying or shutting off AC power Fig. 2-6 34-24
Left lower cover interlock according to the opening/closing state
switch of the left lower cover

2.3.3 Electromagnetic clutch

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

CLT1 HTR-TRANS-CLT Connecting or disconnecting the trans- Fig. 2-5 21-15


Heater transport clutch port roller driving after images are
erased

2.3.4 Solenoids

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

SOL1 HTR-GT-SOL Switching the gate to the erase section Fig. 2-5 20-4
Heater gate solenoid or the paper exit section

SOL2 REJE-GT-SOL Switching the gate to the reject drawer Fig. 2-6 31-15
Reject drawer gate solenoid

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2 - 10
2.3.5 PC boards

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I


2
SYS PWA-F-SYS Controlling whole system and image Fig. 2-6 14-5
System control board (SYS processing
board)

PS PWA-F-PWR Generating DC voltage and supplying it Fig. 2-6 27-1


Power supply board (PWR to the components
board)

MAIN PWA-F-MAIN Controlling the engine section Fig. 2-6 14-1


Main board (MAIN board)

SCNB PWA-F-SCN Correcting images Fig. 2-6 14-8


Scanner board (SCN board)

OPB PWA-F-CP Controlling the control panel Fig. 2-6 2-3


Control panel board (OP
board)

LED PWA-F-LED Controlling the LED Fig. 2-6 2-3


Control panel LED board

SSD SSD Saving image data Fig. 2-6 14-7


SSD

PRT PWA-F-PRT Controlling the ink printer Fig. 2-6 13-42


Ink printer board

2.3.6 Lamps

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

LAMP1 HTR-LP-1 Heating the heat roller-1 (for erasing Fig. 2-5 25-22
Heater lamp-1 images on the front side of paper)

LAMP2 HTR-LP-2 Heating the heat roller-2 (for erasing Fig. 2-5 24-18
Heater lamp-2 images on the back side of paper)

2.3.7 Thermistors and thermostats

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

THMO1 THERMO-C-HTR-1 Shutting off the power supply when the Fig. 2-5 26-10
Heat roller-1 center thermo- heat roller-1 shows an abnormal tem-
stat perature rise

THMO2 THERMO-C-HTR-2 Shutting off the power supply when the Fig. 2-5 24-11
Heat roller-2 center thermo- heat roller-2 shows an abnormal tem-
stat perature rise
THMS1 THMS-C-HTR-1 Detecting the temperature of the center Fig. 2-5 26-19
Heat roller-1 center thermistor of the heat roller-1

THMS2 THMS-S-HTR-1 Detecting the temperature of the side of Fig. 2-5 26-19
Heat roller-1 side thermistor the heat roller-1

THMS3 THMS-C-HTR-2 Detecting the temperature of the center Fig. 2-5 24-26
Heat roller-2 center thermistor of the heat roller-2

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2 - 11
Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

THMS4 THMS-S-HTR-2 Detecting the temperature of the side of Fig. 2-5 24-26
Heat roller-2 side thermistor the heat roller-2

2.3.8 Others

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

SCN1 SCN-1 Scanning the front side of the paper Fig. 2-4 12-16
Scanner-1

SCN2 SCN-2 Scanning the back side of the paper Fig. 2-4 16-3
Scanner-2

F1 FAN-1 Cooling down the paper after images Fig. 2-5 9-5
Paper cooling fan-1 are erased

F2 HTR-FAN Cooling down the back side of the Fig. 2-5 16-22
Heater cooling fan paper after images are erased

F3 FAN-3 Cooling down the scanner Fig. 2-5 22-1


Scanner cooling fan

F4 SYS-FAN Cooling down the SYS board Fig. 2-5 14-3


SYS board cooling fan

F5 PWR-FAN Cooling down the power supply unit Fig. 2-6 27-3
Power supply fan

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2 - 12
3. DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION

3.1 Control Panel

3.1.1 General description


The control panel consists of buttons to operate the equipment and select various modes, and LEDs
3
and an LCD to display the state of the equipment or the messages.
When users' attention is required, icons or messages explaining the condition of the equipment are dis-
played in the LCD. When paper jams and "Call for service" occur, error codes are also displayed to
notify users of the problem.

[UP] button
[LEFT] button [RIGHT] button

[DOWN] button

Fig. 3-1

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3-1
3.2 Paper Feeding Section

3.2.1 General descriptions


The purpose of this section is to pick up a sheet of paper to be reused from the reuse paper tray and to
transport it to the scanning position.
The paper feeding section consists of the feed tray paper sensor, paper pull-up sensor, feed sensor,
skew sensor, multi feed paper sensor, registration sensor, pick-up home position sensor, paper feed
cover switch, feed motor, separation motor, pick-up motor and the drive section for these components.

Pick-up roller movement motor


Pick-up roller home position sensor

Rear skew sensor

Feed sensor

Front skew sensor

Feed cover switch

Rear paper pull-up sensor


Multi feed paper sensor

Registration sensor
Front paper pull-up sensor

Feed motor Separation motor Feed tray paper sensor

Fig. 3-2

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3-2
3.2.2 Composition

Paper feeding section

Reuse paper tray Feed tray paper sensor S1

Paper pull-up sensor S2/S3


3
Feed sensor S4

Skew sensor S5/S6

Multi feed paper sensor S7

Registration sensor S8

Pick-up home position sensor S9

Paper feed cover switch SW1

Drive section, other Feed motor M1

Separation motor M2

Pick-up motor M3

3.2.3 Functions
1. Feed tray paper sensor (S1)
This sensor detects whether paper to be reused is set in the reuse paper tray or not.
2. Paper pull-up sensors (S2/S3)
This sensor detects the paper pull-up at its front and rear sides if stapled reuse paper is fed.
3. Feed sensor (S4)
This sensor detects paper feeding at the paper exit. It also detects the stop position for the paper
size measurement.
4. Skew sensor (S5/S6)
These sensors detect paper skew. They are located at the front and rear sides.
5. Multi feed paper sensor (S7)
This is an ultrasonic sensor to detect multiple paper feeding.
6. Registration sensor (S8)
This sensor detects the paper feed exit position.
7. Pick-up home position sensor (S9)
This sensor detects the home position of the pick-up roller movement drive.
8. Paper feed cover switch (SW1)
This switch detects the opening/closing status of the paper feed cover.
9. Feed motor (M1)
This motor drives the pickup roller, feed roller and registration roller.
10.Separation motor (M2)
This motor drives the separation roller.
11. Pick-up motor (M3)
This motor drives the pick-up roller movement cam by means of the worm gear, and thus the pick-up
roller is moved up and down.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3-3
3.2.4 Operation

[A] Detection of multiple paper feeding


In this equipment, multiple paper feeding is detected with a transmissive ultrasonic sensor. An air layer
is made between multiple sheets of paper which are being transported during stacking. When this sen-
sor detects an air layer, multiple paper feeding is determined.
If the leading edge of the paper has reached the registration roller when multiple paper feeding is
detected, the transport is stopped as a paper jam. If it has not reached the registration roller, paper
feeding is retried. If multiple paper feeding is detected even though retrying has happened twice, an
alert is generated and the transport is stopped.

[B] Detection of reuse paper pull-up


When stapled paper is fed, the pick-up roller picks up the top sheet of the paper, meaning of that all the
stapled sheets of paper are raised accordingly. When this phenomenon occurs, sheets of paper contact
with the actuators on the alignment plates, thus the setting of stapled paper is detected.
When stapled paper is detected, an alert is generated and the transport is stopped.

[C] Detection of paper skew


The sensors to detect paper skew are located at the front and rear sides. If the skew sensor at the rear
is not turned ON when a specified time has passed after the sensor at the front is turned ON, or the
opposite, an alert is generated and the transport is stopped.

[D] Operation of pick-up home position


In this equipment, a DC motor is used to move the pick-up roller, and its home position is detected by
the sensor.
If the pick-up roller movement motor is ON for a specified period, the pick-up roller is lowered to the
paper feed position. When paper is fed by the feed motor, the pick-up roller movement motor is ON for
a specified period and it is moved upward. When the home position is detected, the pick-up roller is
stopped at the upper position.

[E] General description of transport operation in the paper feeding section


• When paper to be reused is set in the reuse paper tray and the corresponding sensor is turned ON,
the [START] button on the control panel becomes operable.
• When the [START] button is pressed, the pick-up roller movement motor is turned ON and the pick-
up roller is lowered.
• Paper is transported when the feed motor and the separation motor are turned ON simultaneously,
and the pick-up roller, feed roller and separation roller are rotated.
• Paper transportation is stopped at the position in which paper reaches the registration roller when a
specified amount of paper has been transported after the feed sensor has been turned ON. Paper is
aligned by the registration roller. Then paper is transported by rotating the feed motor in the reverse
direction.
• Paper transportation starts when the registration roller has been turned ON, and finishes when the
specified amount of transportation has been performed.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3-4
3.3 Paper Transport Section

3.3.1 General description


The purpose of this section is to transport the paper fed from the paper feeding section to the scanning,
erase and paper exit sections.
The sensors are mounted in the paper transporting path, and they detect reaching or passing of the
3
paper.
If the sensors detect paper remaining for a longer period than the specified time or non-reaching of
paper, they determine that a paper jam has occurred. The operation is stopped and paper jam is noti-
fied on the control panel. The following table shows the sensors and the motors which control the paper
transport in this section.

3.3.2 Composition

Paper transport section

Sensor Exit pass sensor S12

1st transport sensor S14

2nd transport sensor S15

Erase unit entrance sensor S16

Erase unit exit sensor S17

3rd transport sensor S18

4th transport sensor S19

Drive section, other Speed adjustment motor M5

3.3.3 Functions
1. 1st transport sensor (S14)
This is the paper detection sensor mounted in the paper path leading to the erase unit after scan-
ning. This sensor is located before the 1st transport roller and detects the transport state of short
paper.
2. 2nd transport sensor (S15)
This sensor is located after the 2nd transport roller and detects the paper transport state between
the scanning section and the erase section. In addition, it is used to detect the speed switching tim-
ing of the speed adjustment motor.
3. Erase unit entrance sensor (S16)
This sensor detects the paper transport state at the erase unit entrance section.
4. Erase unit exit sensor (S17)
This sensor detects the paper transport state at the erase unit exit section.
5. 3rd transport sensor (S18)
This sensor is located after the erase unit exit sensor and detects the paper transport state between
the erase section and the scanning section.
6. 4th transport sensor (S19)
This sensor is located after the 4th transport roller and detects the short-size paper transport state
between the erase section and the scanning section.
7. Exit path sensor (S12)
This sensor detects the paper transport state when it is transported to the paper exit section by the
gate switching.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3-5
8. Speed adjustment motor (M5)
This motor is used to transport the paper fed from the scanning section to the erase section. The
paper which has passed through the scanning section is transported while the transport speed is
increased with this motor.

3.3.4 Operation

[A] Transport speed adjustment between the scanning section and the erase section
• The scan motor controls the paper transport at the specified speed.
• The paper which was scanned and passed through the scanning section is transported by the 1st
transport roller and the 2nd transport roller.
• When the 2nd transport sensor has been turned OFF, the speed of the speed adjustment motor is
increased, and thus the 1st transport roller and the 2nd transport roller transport the paper accord-
ingly.
• When the 2nd transport sensor has been turned ON, the speed adjustment motor is stopped. Then
the transport speed is decreased to the same one as that of the erase unit, and the paper is trans-
ported.
• Paper whose transport speed has been decreased is transported to the erase unit.
• The erase unit motor drives the erase unit and controls the paper transport at the specified speed.

Erase unit motor

Scanning section
Scan motor

Scanner exit sensor


Erase section

Speed adjustment motor


Paper stop position
before erasing
1st transport sensor
2nd transport sensor

1st transport roller 2nd transport roller

Fig. 3-3

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3-6
3.4 Scanning Section

3.4.1 General description


The purpose of this section is to scan images on the paper transported from the paper feeding or erase
section by the scanner (CCD line sensor). Since the front and back sides are equipped with one scan-
ner each, it is possible to scan both sides of the paper simultaneously while it passes through this sec-
3
tion.
When the paper is transported from the paper feeding section, images are scanned and stored in a net-
work server or a USB device. Paper whose images have been scanned is transported to the erase sec-
tion and the toner colors are erased. After that, the paper is transported to the scanning section again to
check the erasure condition. Then the paper is evaluated and sorted as reusable or non-usable (reject).
The sorted paper is transported to the reuse drawer or the reject drawer. At that time, the pixels of the
scanned image of paper with erased toner color is counted, and thus only paper which is determined to
be unsuitable for reuse (with a large print ratio) is sorted to the reject-paper drawer.

Scanner entrance sensor


Shading sheet home
position sensor
Left upper cover switch
Shading motor

Scanner-1
Scanner-2
Scan motor

Scanner exit sensor

Fig. 3-4

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3-7
3.4.2 Composition

Scanning section

Sensor Scanner entrance sensor S10

Scanner exit sensor S11

Shading sheet home position sensor S13

Scanner Scanner-1 SCN1

Scanner-2 SCN2

Drive section, other Shading motor M6

Scan motor M4

Left upper cover switch SW2

3.4.3 Functions
1. Scanner entrance sensor (S10)
This sensor detects the paper transport state and image scanning timing.
2. Scanner exit sensor (S11)
This sensor detects the transport path switching timing to transport the paper to the erase section or
the paper exit section by means of the gate solenoid.
3. Shading sheet home position sensor (S13)
This sensor detects the home position of the shading sheet.
4. Scanner-1 (SCN1)
This scanner scans the paper before and after erasing images. This is located at the outside of the
paper transport path and scans the front side of the paper.
5. Scanner-2 (SCN2)
This scanner scans the paper before and after erasing images. This is located at the inside of the
paper transport path and scans the back side of the paper.
6. Shading motor (M6)
This motor moves the shading sheet.
7. Scan motor (M4)
This motor is used to transport the paper to the scanning section. This is also used to transport the
paper to the paper exit section.
8. Left upper cover switch (SW2)
This switch detects the opening/closing of the left upper cover.

3.4.4 Operation

[A] Operation of the shading sheet


When the shading motor is turned ON, the pulley and the drum are rotated, and thus the shading sheet
enters into the transport path between the scanner-1 and scanner-2.
When the shading sheet home position sensor has been turned OFF, the shading sheet starts to come
out for a specified amount.
When the shading sheet has come out and stopped at the positions of the scanner-1 and scanner-2,
the scanning of the sheet is performed in the order of the scanner-1 and scanner-2.
When the scanning by the scanner-2 has been finished, the shading motor rotates in the reverse direc-
tion and the shading sheet is returned to its original condition. When the shading sheet home position
sensor has been turned ON, the shading motor is turned OFF at a specified amount position.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3-8
Shading sheet home
position sensor

Shading motor
3

CW

Scanner-1 CCW

Scanner-2

Shading sheet

Fig. 3-5

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3-9
3.5 Erase Section

3.5.1 General description


The purpose of this section is to erase the toner colors by applying heat to the paper transported from
the scanning section.
A heater lamp is equipped inside of the heat roller. The heater lamp receives pressure from the facing
pressure roller, and thus the heat of the lamp is applied to the paper. The erase unit in this equipment is
equipped with 2 components of the above mechanisms and it is possible to apply heat to both the
paper front and back sides simultaneously. Therefore, the toner colors on both sides of the paper are
erased simultaneously in one passage.
The paper with erased images is transported to the scanning section.

Heater transport clutch


Erase unit motor
Heater cooling fan

Heat roller-2
center thermostat

Heater lamp-2

Heat roller-1
center thermostat
Heat roller-2
center thermistor
Heat roller-1
center thermistor

Heat roller-1
side thermistor

Heat roller-2
side thermistor Heater lamp-1 Right lower cover switch

Fig. 3-6

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3 - 10
3.5.2 Composition

Erase section

Thermistor Heat roller-1 center thermistor THMS1

Heat roller-1 side thermistor THMS2


3
Heat roller-2 center thermistor THMS3

Heat roller-2 side thermistor THMS4

Thermostat Heat roller-1 center thermostat THMO1

Heat roller-2 center thermostat THMO2

Lamp Heater lamp-1 LAMP1

Heater lamp-2 LAMP2

Drive section, other Erase unit motor M7

Heater transport clutch CLT1

Heater fan F2

Right lower cover switch SW4

3.5.3 Functions
1. Heat roller-1 center thermistor (THMS1)
This is the contact thermistor to detect the temperature of the center of the heat roller-1.
2. Heat roller-1 side thermistor (THMS2)
This is the contact thermistor to detect the temperature of the side of the heat roller-1.
3. Heat roller-2 center thermistor (THMS3)
This is the contact thermistor to detect the temperature of the center of the heat roller-2.
4. Heat roller-2 side thermistor (THMS4)
This is the contact thermistor to detect the temperature of the side of the heat roller-2.
5. Heat roller-1 center thermostat (THMO1)
This thermostat shuts off the power supply to the heater lamp-1 when an abnormal temperature rise
of the heat roller-1 is detected.
6. Heat roller-2 center thermostat (THMO2)
This thermostat shuts off the power supply to the heater lamp-2 when an abnormal temperature rise
of the heat roller-2 is detected.
7. Heater lamp-1 and heater lamp-2 (LAMP1, LAMP2)
The heater lamp-1 and lamp-2 are halogen lamps to apply heat to the heat roller-1 and lamp-2, cor-
respondingly. Heating by the heater lamp-1 causes heat to reach the back side of the paper, the
heater lamp-2 can erase toner colors with less power than the heater lamp-1.
8. Erase unit motor (M7)
This motor drives the heat roller-1, heat roller-2, pressure roller-1 and pressure roller-2 in the erase
unit. It also drives the 3rd and 4th transport rollers through the heater transport clutch so that the
paper is transported to the scanning section.
9. Heater transport clutch (CLT1)
This clutch connects or disconnects the driving from the erase unit motor to the 3rd and 4th trans-
port rollers.
10.Heater fan (F2)
This fan cools down the paper with erased images.
11. Right lower cover switch (SW4)
This switch detects the opening/closing of the right lower cover.
12.Heat roller-1

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3 - 11
This roller is heated by the embedded heater lamp-1 and erases toner colors on the front side of the
paper.
13.Heat roller-2
This roller is heated by the embedded heater lamp-2 and erases toner colors on the front side of the
paper.
14.Pressure roller
This roller is located facing the heat roller-1 and -2, and applies pressures to them. As a result, the
necessary nip amount for the heat rollers for erasing toner colors can be determined.

3.5.4 Operation

[A] Erasing method


When images are erased on both sides of the paper, the heater lamp-1 and lamp-2 are turned ON to
apply heat to the heat roller-1 and roller-2. The heat roller-1 is located so that it contacts with the front
side of the paper, and receives pressure from the facing pressure roller. In a similar way, the heat roller-
2 is located so that it contacts with the back side of the paper, and receives pressure from the facing
pressure roller. Heat is applied to both sides of the paper and images are erased by passing the paper
between the heat roller-1 and roller-2.
When images are erased only on the front side of the paper, only the heat roller-1 is heated, but the
heat roller-2 is not.

Heat roller-2
Heater lamp-2

Heat roller-2
center thermostat

Heat roller-2
center thermistor
Pressure roller
Heat roller-2
side thermistor

Heat roller-1
center thermostat

Pressure roller Heat roller-1


side thermistor

Paper transport direction


Heat roller-1 center thermistor

Heat roller-1

Heater lamp-1

Fig. 3-7

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3 - 12
3.5.5 Control of the erase unit temperature / safety device
The surface temperature of the heat roller-1 and roller-2 is detected by the thermistor. If the detected
temperature is higher than the specified one, power supplying to the heater lamp-1 and lamp-2 is shut
off. If it is lower, power is supplied to the heater lamp-1 and lamp-2 to control the surface temperature of
the heat roller-1 and roller-2 becomes constant.
The thermostats are equipped in the heat roller-1 and roller-2 to prevent overheating. If an abnormal
temperature raise occurs, power supplying to the heater lamp-1 and lamp-2 are shut off by the thermo- 3
stats.

Rear side

Heat roller-2 Heat roller-2


center thermostat

Heat roller-2
center thermistor

Heat roller-2
side thermistor

Heater lamp-2 Heat roller-1


center thermostat
Heat roller-1
center thermistor
Front side Heat roller-1 side thermistor

Heater lamp-1 Heat roller-1

Fig. 3-8

3.5.6 Heat control circuit


The surface temperature of the heat roller-1 and roller-2 is controlled by turning the heater lamp-1 and
lamp-2 ON/OFF.
The temperature of the heat rollers is detected by 2 thermistors (the center and side thermistors for the
heat roller-1 and roller-2), and its information is sent to the engine CPU and each control circuit. Based
on the detected temperature, the engine CPU sends a heater lamp control signal to the heater lamp
control circuits on the power supply board through the temperature control circuit, and controls the
power supply to the heat rollers by driving the circuits. In addition, the temperature control circuit
detects any overheating of the heat roller and turns it OFF if its surface temperature exceeds the spec-
ified one.
If the temperature control circuit does not function for some reason and the heat roller is heated abnor-
mally as a result, the power is forcibly turned OFF. If these circuits do not function because of an abnor-
mality of the thermistor, etc. and the heat roller is overheated, the power supply to the heater lamps is
shut off by the 2 thermostats (for the heat roller-1 and roller-2) to protect the equipment.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3 - 13
Main power switch

LVPS
Interlock switch

Fuse
L Relay
FIL
N Lamp circuit

Heat roller-1

Heater lamp-1

Pressure roller-1

Pressure roller-2

AWG18 N
Heat roller-2
AWG18 N
Heater lamp-2

AWG16 L

Heater for erasing MAIN

Fig. 3-9

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3 - 14
3.6 Paper Exit Section

3.6.1 General description


Paper fed from the scanning section is transported to the reuse drawer or the reject drawer and stacked
in the paper exit section. It is aligned and stacked by the reuse drawer aligning roller in the reuse
drawer.
3
Paper with erased images (reusable paper) is output to the reuse drawer, and that with unerased
images (rejected paper) to the reject drawer after its images are scanned and erased.
Paper is output to the reuse drawer after its images are erased only. Paper is output to the reject drawer
after its images are scanned only.
When the leading edge of paper transported from the scanning section reaches the reuse drawer, it is
stopped and then sorted into the reuse or reject drawer.

Left lower cover switch

Reject drawer gate solenoid

Reject drawer paper full sensor

Reuse drawer entrance sensor Reuse drawer paper full sensor

Reuse drawer aligning


roller lift motor

Reuse drawer sensor


5th transport sensor

Reuse drawer exit motor

Reject drawer sensor

Power supply fan

Fig. 3-10

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3 - 15
3.6.2 Composition

Paper exit section

Sensor Exit sensor S20

Reuse drawer paper full sensor S21

5th transport sensor S22

Reject drawer paper full sensor S23

Reuse drawer sensor S24

Reject drawer sensor S25

Solenoid Reject drawer gate solenoid SOL2

Drive section, other Reuse drawer exit motor M8

Reuse drawer aligning roller lift motor M9

Left lower cover switch SW6

Switching regulator cooling fan F5

3.6.3 Functions
1. Exit sensor (S20)
This sensor detects the stop timing for the image erasing check and the transport timing when the
images are unerased.
2. Reuse drawer paper full sensor (S21)
This sensor detects paper full in the reuse drawer.
3. 5th transport sensor (S22)
This sensor detects paper jamming in the paper transport path of the reject drawer, and the timing
corresponding to the speed of the paper output to the reject drawer.
4. Reject drawer paper full sensor (S23)
This sensor detects paper full in the reject drawer.
5. Reuse drawer sensor (S24)
This sensor detects the presence/absence of the reuse drawer.
6. Reject drawer sensor (S25)
This sensor detects the presence/absence of the reject drawer.
7. Left lower cover switch (SW6)
This detects the opening/closing of the left lower cover.
8. Reject drawer gate solenoid (SOL2)
This switches the gate to the reuse drawer or to the reject drawer.
9. Reuse drawer exit motor (M8)
This motor transports paper to the reuse drawer or the reject drawer, driving the reuse drawer exit
roller, reject drawer exit roller and reject path roller.
10.Aligning roller lift motor (M9)
This drives the reuse drawer aligning roller up and down.
11. Switching regulator cooling fan (F5)
This fan cools down the power supply.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3 - 16
3.6.4 Operation

[A] Operation of the reuse drawer aligning roller


Paper is judged as to whether it is reusable or not by being scanned after its printed images are erased.
The unreusable paper is output to the reject drawer, the reusable paper to the reuse drawer and aligned
by the reuse drawer aligning roller.
• Paper fed to the paper exit section is transported to the reuse drawer by the reject drawer gate sole- 3
noid.
• If the paper is reusable, it is output to the reuse drawer. The reuse drawer aligning roller lift motor is
turned ON and the aligning roller is lowered to hold the paper.
• If the paper is not reusable, the reuse drawer exit roller is rotated in reverse to switch back the paper
transported to the reuse drawer.
• The reject drawer path is switched and the paper is transported to the reject drawer.
• The paper is transported by the 5th transport roller and the reject drawer exit roller and output to the
reject drawer.

Reject drawer gate solenoid

Reuse drawer aligning roller lift motor

Reuse drawer exit roller Reuse drawer aligning roller

5th transport roller

Reject drawer exit roller

Fig. 3-11

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3 - 17
3.7 Ink Printer

3.7.1 General description


In this equipment, "dot marks" are printed by an ink printer on the edge of the paper. For each one time
the images are erased, one dot mark is printed. This is done after scanning is performed subsequent to
the erasing.
The number of dot marks is detected by the scanner to recognize the erasure count or the number of
paper reuse times. This is done when scanning is performed before the erasing. When the paper reuse
number reaches the previously set one, the paper is output to the reject drawer.

3.7.2 Functions

[A] Printing
The position where “dot marks” are printed is determined depending on the detected mark numbers.
The mark size is 7 dots x 10 dots.

[B] Erasure count detection (Dot mark detection)


Images of both sides of the paper are scanned before being erased. The paper size is identified from
these scanned images and the number of dot marks is detected on the upper left and lower right of the
front and back sides respectively only for A4 or LT size paper.

[C] Erasure count detection settings


Functions for the erasing time detection can be set in the [Administration] menu of TopAccess or with
the self-diagnostic codes.
• Code 6360 (Switching ON/OFF the erasure count function)

Default value: 0
0: OFF, 1: ON
Sets this function to ON/OFF.

• Code 6370 (Switching the normal/reject mode)


Default value: 0
0: Normal mode, 1: Reuse mode
Normal mode: Reuse paper according to the count number set in code 6380.
Reject mode: Does not reject paper no matter how many times it is reused.
The dot marks can be printed up to 10 times; if this is exceeded, they are not printed.

• Code 6380 (Setting the erasable count number)


Sets the erasable number of toner colors on the paper.
Default value: 6 (times)
Acceptable value: 3 to 10 (times)

[D] Idling operation


To prevent the ink from clogging, idling is regularly performed. A specified time after the previous print
or idling is performed, the next idling will be done when the power is turned ON or the subsequent era-
sure is performed.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DESCRIPTION OF OPEARTION
3 - 18
4. DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION

4.1 Cover

4.1.1 Front cover

(1) Remove 2 caps, and then remove 2 screws.


4

Fig. 4-1

(2) Open the right upper cover and right lower


cover, remove 2 screws and then lift up the
front cover [1] to take it off.

Fig. 4-2

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4-1
4.1.2 Upper cover

(1) Take off the front cover.


 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(2) Take off the upper rear cover.
 P.4-9 "4.1.7 Upper rear cover"
(3) Remove 2 screws.

Fig. 4-3

(4) Open the right upper cover and remove 2


screws.

Fig. 4-4

(5) Open the paper feed cover [1] and remove


the separation roller holder [2].
(6) Release the harnesses from 2 harness
clamps.

Fig. 4-5

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4-2
(7) Remove 2 screws and lift up the upper cover
[1] to take it off.

Fig. 4-6

(8) Disconnect 2 connectors [1] from the control


panel board. Remove the upper cover.

Fig. 4-7

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4-3
4.1.3 Paper feed cover

(1) Open the paper feed cover [1].


Loosen 2 screws.

Fig. 4-8

Fig. 4-9

(2) Take off the paper guide [2] by opening its


latches to right and left.
Note:
When installing the paper guide, insert 3 pro-
trusions [3] at the bottom of the guide into the
holes on the equipment side.

Fig. 4-10

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4-4
(3) Remove 4 screws and 1 ground wire.
Remove 1 spring [1].

Fig. 4-11

(4) Remove 3 screws and 1 ground wire.

Fig. 4-12

(5) Rotate the lever, and slide the paper feed


cover [1] to the left to take it off.

Fig. 4-13

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4-5
Note:
The 3 hooks [3] under the paper feed cover
should be hooked on the holes of the frame.

Fig. 4-14

4.1.4 Left upper cover

(1) Take off the front cover.


 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(2) Open the left upper cover [1], release 2 fin-
gers and push up the guide [2].

Fig. 4-15

(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the cover shaft


[3].

Fig. 4-16

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4-6
(4) Open the left center cover. Take off the left
upper cover [1].

Fig. 4-17

4.1.5 Left center cover

(1) Take off the front cover.


 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(2) Open the left center cover [1], release 2 fin-
gers and push up the guide [2].

Fig. 4-18

(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the front side


shaft [3].

Fig. 4-19

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4-7
(4) Open the left lower cover.
(5) Take off the left center cover [1] with releas-
ing the rear side shaft.

Fig. 4-20

4.1.6 Rear cover

(1) Remove 3 screws, pull the rear cover [1]


backward and lift it up to take it off.

Fig. 4-21

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4-8
4.1.7 Upper rear cover

(1) Remove 2 caps and then, remove 2 screws


and take off the upper rear cover [1].

Fig. 4-22

4.1.8 Left rear cover

(1) Open the left upper cover, left center cover


and left lower cover.
(2) Remove 4 screws. Lift the left center cover
[1], slide the left rear cover towards the rear
side and take it off.

Fig. 4-23

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4-9
4.1.9 Right rear cover

(1) Remove 2 screws and take off the right rear


cover [1].

Fig. 4-24

4.1.10 Right lower cover

(1) Take off the front cover.


 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(2) Take off the rear cover.
 P.4-8 "4.1.6 Rear cover"
(3) Take off the right rear cover.
 P.4-10 "4.1.9 Right rear cover"
(4) Take off the reuse drawer and reject drawer.
 P.4-125 "4.7.20 Reuse drawer"
 P.4-125 "4.7.21 Reject drawer"
(5) Remove 1 screw on the front side.

Fig. 4-25

(6) Remove 2 screws on the rear side and take


off the right lower cover.

Fig. 4-26

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 10
4.1.11 Right center cover

(1) Take off the right lower cover.


 P.4-10 "4.1.10 Right lower cover"
(2) Remove 1 screw on the front side and take
off the hinge [1].

Fig. 4-27

(3) Remove 1 screw on the rear side and take


off the hinge [2].

Fig. 4-28

(4) Take off the right center cover [3].

Fig. 4-29

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 11
4.1.12 Right upper cover

(1) Take off the front cover.


 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(2) Open the right upper cover. Slide the sup-
ports [2] to the larger portion of the arm hole
[1] to take them off on both the front and rear
sides.

Fig. 4-30

Fig. 4-31

(3) Open the left center cover.


(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the front side
holder [3].

Fig. 4-32

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 12
(5) Disconnect 1 connector [4] of the paper cool-
ing fan-1.

Fig. 4-33

(6) Take off the right upper cover [5].

Fig. 4-34

4.1.13 Left lower cover

(1) Remove the reject drawer.


 P.4-125 "4.7.21 Reject drawer"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the cover [1].

Fig. 4-35

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 13
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the front side
cover shaft [2].

Fig. 4-36

(4) Take off the power supply board case.


 P.8-3 "8.1.6 Power supply board case"
(5) Remove 1 screw and take off the rear side
cover shaft [3].

Fig. 4-37

(6) Take off the left lower cover [4].

Fig. 4-38

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 14
4.1.14 Handle

(1) Take off the upper rear cover.


 P.4-9 "4.1.7 Upper rear cover"
(2) Remove 1 screw each, and take off the 2
handles [1].

Fig. 4-39

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 15
4.2 Control Panel

4.2.1 Control panel board (OP board)

(1) Take off the upper cover.


 P.4-2 "4.1.2 Upper cover"
(2) Remove 7 screws, disconnect 1 connector
[1] and take off the control panel board [2].

Fig. 4-40

4.2.2 LED board

(1) Take off the upper cover.


 P.4-2 "4.1.2 Upper cover"
(2) Remove 1 screws and take off the LED
board [1].
(3) Disconnect 1 connector [2].

Fig. 4-41

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 16
4.3 Paper Feeding Section

4.3.1 Paper feeding unit

(1) Open the paper feed cover [1].


(2) Loosen 1 screw on the front side. Loosen 1
screw on the rear side.

Fig. 4-42

Fig. 4-43

Note:
Be sure to attach the feed roller to the equip-
ment model correspondingly since it differs
between e-STUDIO RD30 and e-STUDIO
RD301.
e-STUDIO RD30 : Gray
e-STUDIO RD301 : Red

Fig. 4-44

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 17
(3) Take off the paper guide [2] by releasing its
latches to front and rear.
Note:
When installing the paper guide, insert 3 pro-
trusions [3] at the bottom of the guide into the
holes on the equipment side.

Fig. 4-45

(4) Lift up 2 stoppers [4] and release 2 holders


[5].

Fig. 4-46

(5) Slide the paper feeding unit [6] to the front to


take it off.

Fig. 4-47

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 18
Notes:
Install the paper feeding unit following the [2]
procedure below.
1. Engage 2 bushings [1] with 2 metal plates
[2] while the unit is kept upright.

[1]
4

Fig. 4-48

In this procedure, do not engage the gear


[1] and the gear [2] of the unit with each
other.
[2]

[1]

Fig. 4-49

2. Rotate the gear [1] one turn and align the


pin [2] to the center of the groove [3] of
the shaft. [2]

[1]

[3]

Fig. 4-50

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 19
3. Make sure that the gears of the unit are
engaged with each other, and then slide
the unit to the rear.

Fig. 4-51

4. Lift up the stopper [1] while holding the


unit, and then lock the holder [2].

[1]

[2]

Fig. 4-52

5. Make sure that the bushing [1] is securely


inserted into the cutout [2] of the metal
plate. Then lift up the latch [3] and lock [3]
the holder [4].
[2]

[1]

[4]

Fig. 4-53

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 20
Note:
Confirm that the bushing [7] is located at the
appropriate attachment position (inside of
the holder).

Fig. 4-54

4.3.2 Separation roller

(1) Open the paper feed cover.


(2) Take off the separation roller holder [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-55

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 21
(3) Remove the clip [4], separation roller [2] and
torque limiter [3].
Notes: [3]
1. When installing the torque limiter, align [4]
the pin of the shaft and the groove of the
torque limiter.
2. When installing the separation roller, align
the protrusion of the torque limiter and the
groove of the separation roller.

[2]

Fig. 4-56

3. Be sure to attach the separation roller to


the equipment model correspondingly
since it differs between e-STUDIO RD30
and e-STUDIO RD301.
e-STUDIO RD30:Gray
e-STUDIO RD301:Red

e-STUDIO RD301 e-STUDIO RD30

Fig. 4-57

4.3.3 Pick-up roller movement motor (M3)

(1) Take off the paper feed cover.


 P.4-4 "4.1.3 Paper feed cover"
(2) Remove 2 screws and then take off the
bracket [1].
Note:
When installing, engage the protrusion of the
arm [2] with its bushing.

Fig. 4-58

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 22
(3) Disconnect 1 connector [4].

Fig. 4-59

(4) Remove 2 screws and then take off the pick-


up roller movement motor [1].
Note:
Make sure the size and length of the screws
are correct. If they are not, the motor could
be damaged.

Fig. 4-60

4.3.4 Pick-up roller home position sensor (S9)

(1) Take off the paper feed cover.


 P.4-23 "4.3.4 Pick-up roller home position
sensor (S9)"
(2) Remove 2 screws and then take off the
bracket [1].
Note:
When installing, engage the protrusion of the
arm [2] with its bushing.

Fig. 4-61

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 23
(3) Disconnect 1 connector [4].
(4) Take off the pick-up roller home position sen-
sor [5].

Fig. 4-62

4.3.5 Feed sensor (S4) / Front skew sensor (S5) / Rear skew sensor
(S6) / Multi feed paper sensor (S7) on the sending side

(1) Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket of


the pick-up roller movement motor [1].
 P.4-22 "4.3.3 Pick-up roller movement
motor (M3)"
Note:
When installing, be sure to attach the arm [2]
firmly [3].

(2) Take off the paper feeding unit.

Fig. 4-63

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 24
(3) Remove 1 clip [4]. Slide the shaft to remove
the arm [5] at the front side.

Fig. 4-64
Note:
When installing, be sure to place the gear so
that the inside of its tooth comes upward to
place the arm on it.

Fig. 4-65

(4) Remove 2 clips [6]. Slide the bearing [7] and


bushing [8] to take off the arm [9] at the rear
side.

Fig. 4-66

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 25
Note:
When installing, be sure to place the gear so
that the inside of its tooth comes upward to
place the arm on it.

Fig. 4-67

(5) Remove 3 screws.

Fig. 4-68

(6) Remove 3 screws at the front side. Remove


1 clip [10] and 1 bushing [11].

Fig. 4-69

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 26
(7) Remove 3 screws at the rear side. Remove 1
clip [12] and 1 bushing [13].

Fig. 4-70

(8) Remove 1 screw and take off the sensor stay


[14].

Fig. 4-71

(9) Disconnect 1 connector [15] and take off the


front skew sensor [16].
(10) Disconnect 1 connector [17] and take off the
feed sensor [18].
(11) Disconnect 1 connector [19] and take off the
rear skew sensor [20].
Note:
When connecting the connectors, check the
color of the harnesses; brown for the front
skew sensor, black for the paper feed sensor
and red for the rear skew sensor.

Fig. 4-72

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 27
(12) Disconnect 1 connector [21].
(13) Remove 1 screw and then take off the multi
feed paper sensor on the sending side [22].
Note:
When taking off the multi feed paper sensor
on the receiving side, see the page below.
 P.4-29 "4.3.7 Feed tray paper sensor
(S1)"

Fig. 4-73

4.3.6 Multi feed paper sensor (S7) on the receiving side

(1) Take off the upper cover.


 P.4-2 "4.1.2 Upper cover"
(2) Remove 4 screws and then take off the
paper guide [1].

Fig. 4-74

(3) Remove 2 screws and then take off the multi


feed paper sensor on the receiving side [1].
Note:
Install the multi feed paper sensor on the
receiving side [1] by directing the connector
to the registration roller side.

(4) Release the harness from its clamp.


(5) Disconnect 1 connector [2].
Note:
When taking off the multi feed paper sensor
(S7) on the sending side, see the page
below.
 P.4-28 "4.3.6 Multi feed paper sensor
(S7) on the receiving side" Fig. 4-75

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 28
4.3.7 Feed tray paper sensor (S1)

(1) Take off the upper cover.


 P.4-2 "4.1.2 Upper cover"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1].
(3) Insert your hand underneath the right upper
cover, and then take off the feed tray paper
sensor [2].

Fig. 4-76

4.3.8 Front paper pull-up sensor (S2)

(1) Take off the upper cover.


 P.4-2 "4.1.2 Upper cover"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1].
(3) Remove 1 screw and then take off the front
paper pull-up sensor [2].

Fig. 4-77

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 29
4.3.9 Rear paper pull-up sensor (S3)

(1) Take off the upper cover.


 P.4-2 "4.1.2 Upper cover"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1].
(3) Remove 1 screw and then take off the rear
paper pull-up sensor [2].

Fig. 4-78

4.3.10 Paper feed cover switch (SW1)

(1) Take off the upper cover.


 P.4-2 "4.1.2 Upper cover"
(2) Remove 1 screw and then take off the paper
feed cover switch [1].
(3) Remove 2 terminals [2].
Note:
When installing, be sure the terminals are
attached to the correct position shown in the
right-hand figure.

Fig. 4-79

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 30
4.3.11 Feed cover interlock switch (SW7)

(1) Take off the upper cover.


 P.4-2 "4.1.2 Upper cover"
(2) Remove 1 screw and then take off the feed
cover interlock switch [1].
(3) Remove 2 terminals [2].
Note:
When installing, be sure the terminals are
attached to the correct position shown in the 4
right-hand figure.

Fig. 4-80

4.3.12 Registration sensor (S8)

(1) Take off the upper cover.


 P.4-2 "4.1.2 Upper cover"
(2) Remove 4 screws and then take off the
paper guide [1].

Fig. 4-81

(3) Take off the scanner cooling fan.


 P.4-93 "4.6.29 Scanner cooling fan (F3)"
(4) Remove 1 screw.

Fig. 4-82

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 31
(5) Raise the stay [1] to disconnect 1 connector
[2].
(6) Take off the registration sensor [3].

Fig. 4-83

4.3.13 Registration roller

(1) Take off the upper cover.


 P.4-2 "4.1.2 Upper cover"
(2) Remove 4 screws and then take off the
paper guide [1].

Fig. 4-84

(3) Take off the rear cover.


 P.4-8 "4.1.6 Rear cover"
(4) Remove 1 screw and the handle [1].

Fig. 4-85

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 32
(5) Loosen 1 screw.
(6) Remove 1 clip [1] and 1 pulley [2].

Fig. 4-86

(7) Remove 1 clip [1] and 1 bushing [2].

Fig. 4-87

(8) Take off the registration roller [1].

Fig. 4-88

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 33
4.3.14 Feed motor (M1)

(1) Take off the upper cover.


 P.4-2 "4.1.2 Upper cover"
(2) Remove 4 screws and then take off the
paper guide [1].

Fig. 4-89

(3) Remove 2 screws.

Fig. 4-90

(4) Disconnect 1 connector [1] and then take off


the feed motor [2].

Fig. 4-91

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 34
4.3.15 Separation motor (M2)

(1) Take off the feed motor (M1).


 P.4-34 "4.3.14 Feed motor (M1)"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1].

Fig. 4-92

(3) Remove 2 screws.

Fig. 4-93

(4) Take off the left rear cover.


 P.4-9 "4.1.8 Left rear cover"
(5) Remove 1 screw.

Fig. 4-94

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 35
(6) Take off the right rear cover.
 P.4-10 "4.1.9 Right rear cover"
(7) Remove 1 screw.

Fig. 4-95

(8) Remove 1 screw.

Fig. 4-96

(9) Remove 1 screw.

Fig. 4-97

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 36
(10) Hold the frame [1] as shown in the right-hand
figure, and then lift it up keeping a gap of
approx. 30 mm (1.18 inch) on its rear side.

Fig. 4-98

(11) Insert your hand from the gap on the rear


side, and then take off the separation motor
unit [1] by moving it to the registration roller
side.

Fig. 4-99

(12) Remove 2 screws and then take off the


bracket [1].

Fig. 4-100

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 37
4.4 Paper Transport Section

4.4.1 1st transport sensor (S14)

(1) Take off the front cover.


 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(2) Remove 1 screw.

Fig. 4-101

(3) Take of the stay [1] by turning it from the front


side.
(4) Disconnect 1 connector [2] from the stay and
take off the 1st transport sensor [3].

Fig. 4-102

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 38
4.4.2 1st transport roller

(1) Take off the board case.


 P.8-3 "8.1.6 Power supply board case"
(2) Loosen 2 screws, take off the belt [1].

Fig. 4-103

(3) Take off the front cover.


 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(4) Remove 1 clip [1] and 1 bushing [2] on the
front side.

Fig. 4-104

(5) Take off the 1st transport roller [1].

Fig. 4-105

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 39
(6) Remove 1 E-ring, 1 pulley, 1 pin and 1 bear-
ing from the shaft of the 1st transport roller.

Fig. 4-106

4.4.3 2nd transport sensor (S15)

(1) Take off the front cover.


 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(2) Remove 1 screw.

Fig. 4-107

(3) Take off the stay [1] by turning it from the


front side.
(4) Disconnect 1 connector [2] from the stay and
take off the 2nd transport sensor [3].

Fig. 4-108

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 40
4.4.4 2nd transport roller

(1) Take off the board case.


 P.8-3 "8.1.6 Power supply board case"
(2) Loosen 2 screws, take off the belt [1].

Fig. 4-109

(3) Take off the front cover.


 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(4) Remove 1 clip [1] and 1 bushing [2] on the
front side.

Fig. 4-110

(5) Take off the 2nd transport roller [1] from the
rear side.

Fig. 4-111

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 41
(6) Remove 1 E-ring, 1 pulley, 1 pin and 1 bear-
ing from the 2nd transport roller.

Fig. 4-112

4.4.5 3rd transport sensor (S18)

(1) Take off the front cover.


 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(2) Take off the erase unit.
 P.4-65 "4.6.1 Erase unit"
(3) Take off the board case.
 P.8-3 "8.1.6 Power supply board case"
(4) Remove 5 screws and take off the holder unit
[1].

Fig. 4-113

(5) Remove 4 screws and the stay [1] to the


front side.

Fig. 4-114

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 42
(6) Remove 1 screw and take off the 3rd trans-
port sensor stay [1].

Fig. 4-115

(7) Release the harness from 3 harness clamps


[1] and disconnect 1 connector from the 3rd
transport sensor [2].

Fig. 4-116

(8) Release the latch and take off the 3rd trans-
port sensor [1].

Fig. 4-117

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 43
4.4.6 Inner duct

(1) Take off the 3rd transport sensor stay.


 P.4-42 "4.4.5 3rd transport sensor (S18)"
(2) Remove 2 screws.

Fig. 4-118

(3) Take off the inner duct [1].


Note:
When installing the duct, attach 2 hooks [2]
on the rear guide and tighten the screws.

Fig. 4-119

Fig. 4-120

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 44
4.4.7 Heater cooling fan (F2)

(1) Take off the inner duct.


 P.4-44 "4.4.6 Inner duct"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the heater
cooling fan [1].

Fig. 4-121

4.4.8 3rd transport roller

(1) Take off the inner duct.


 P.4-44 "4.4.6 Inner duct"
(2) Loosen 2 screws and take off the belt [1].

Fig. 4-122

(3) Remove 1 clip [1] and 1 bushing [2] on the


front side.

Fig. 4-123

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 45
(4) Take off the 3rd transport roller [1] from the
rear side.

Fig. 4-124

(5) Remove 2 E-rings, 1 pulley, 1 pin and 1 bear-


ing from the shaft of the 3rd transport roller.

Fig. 4-125

4.4.9 4th transport sensor (S19)

(1) Take off the inner duct.


 P.4-44 "4.4.6 Inner duct"
(2) Remove 1 screw.

Fig. 4-126

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 46
(3) Take out the 4th transport sensor stay [1]
from the front side and release the harness
from the harness clamp [2].

Fig. 4-127

(4) Release the latch and take off the 4th trans-
port sensor [1].

Fig. 4-128

4.4.10 4th transport roller

(1) Take off the 4th transport sensor stay.


 P.4-46 "4.4.9 4th transport sensor (S19)"
(2) Loosen 2 screws and take off the belt [1].

Fig. 4-129

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 47
(3) Remove 1 clip [1] and 1 bushing [2] on the
front side.

Fig. 4-130

(4) Take off the 4th transport roller [1] from the
rear side.

Fig. 4-131

(5) Remove 2 E-rings, 1 pulley, 1 pin and 1 bear-


ing from the shaft of the 4th transport roller.

Fig. 4-132

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 48
4.4.11 Left center cover switch (SW3)

(1) Take off the board case.


 P.8-1 "8.1.1 Board case"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1] and take off the
left center cover switch [2].

Fig. 4-133

4.4.12 Speed adjustment motor (M5)

(1) Take off the board case.


 P.8-1 "8.1.1 Board case"
(2) Loosen 2 screws and take off the belt [1].

Fig. 4-134

(3) Loosen 2 screws.

Fig. 4-135

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 49
(4) Take off the front cover.
 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(5) Disconnect 1 connector [1], slide the speed
adjustment motor [2] to take it off.

Fig. 4-136

4.4.13 Heater gate solenoid (SOL1)

(1) Take off the board case.


 P.8-1 "8.1.1 Board case"
(2) Take off the protrusion [1] of the link arm from
the arm [2].

Fig. 4-137

(3) Remove 2 screws.

Fig. 4-138

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 50
Note:
Before removing the screw, check the posi-
tion on the scale so that you can reinstall it
there.

Fig. 4-139

(4) Disconnect 1 connector [1] and take off the


Heater gate solenoid [2] with the bracket.

Fig. 4-140

4.4.14 Cooling guide

(1) Take off the heat erase unit.


( P.4-65 "4.6.1 Erase unit")
(2) Take off the front cover.
 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the holder [1]
at the front side.

Fig. 4-141

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 51
(4) While holding down the spring [2] at the rear
side of the cooling guide [1], slide it to the
front side to take it off.
Note:
If stains adhere to the cooling guide [1], you
can use alcohol to clean it.

Fig. 4-142

Fig. 4-143

Note:
When installing, be sure to hang the spring
first.

Fig. 4-144

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 52
4.5 Scanning Section

4.5.1 Scanner entrance sensor (S10)

(1) Open the left upper cover and release 2


latches. Then push up the guide [1].

Fig. 4-145

(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket [1].


Note:
Be sure to attach the bracket so that the leaf
spring comes outside.

Fig. 4-146

(3) Disconnect 1 connector [1] and take off the


scanner entrance sensor [2].

Fig. 4-147

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 53
4.5.2 Scanner entrance roller

(1) Take off the board case.


 P.8-1 "8.1.1 Board case"
(2) Loosen 2 screws and take off the belt [1].

Fig. 4-148

(3) Take off the scanner cooling fan.


 P.4-93 "4.6.29 Scanner cooling fan (F3)"
(4) Remove 1 clip [1] and 1 bushing [2] on the
front side.

Fig. 4-149

(5) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket [1]


of the shading sheet home position sensor.

Fig. 4-150

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 54
(6) Take off the scanner entrance roller [1] from
the rear side.

Fig. 4-151

4.5.3 Scanner exit sensor (S11)

(1) Take off the left center cover.


 P.4-7 "4.1.5 Left center cover"
(2) Remove 3 screws and take off the inner
cover [1].

Fig. 4-152

(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket [1].


Note:
When installing / removing the bracket, be
careful not to deform the leaf spring.

Fig. 4-153

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 55
(4) Disconnect 1 connector [1] and take off the
scanner exit sensor [2].

Fig. 4-154

4.5.4 Scanner exit roller

(1) Take off the board case.


 P.8-1 "8.1.1 Board case"
(2) Loosen 2 screws and take off the belt [1].

Fig. 4-155

(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the tensioner


[1].

Fig. 4-156

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 56
(4) Take off the front cover.
 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(5) Remove 1 clip [1] and 1 bushing [2].

Fig. 4-157

(6) Take off the scanner exit roller [1] from the
front side.

Fig. 4-158

4.5.5 Scanner-1 (SCN1)

(1) Take off the left upper cover.


 P.4-6 "4.1.4 Left upper cover"
(2) Remove 3 screws and take off the scanner-1
cover [1].

Fig. 4-159

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 57
(3) Lift the black parts [2] to release the lock.
Remove 1 flat cable [1].

Fig. 4-160

(4) Remove 2 screws.

Fig. 4-161

Note:
Before removing the screw, check the posi-
tion on the scale so that you can reinstall it
there.

Fig. 4-162

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 58
(5) Take off the metal plate [1].
(6) Take off the scanner-1 [2].

Fig. 4-163

Notes:
1. Do not touch the scanner-1 fixing screw.
2. Handle the scanner carefully since it is a
precision part. Do not push the unit or
touch its board area.

Fig. 4-164

4.5.6 Scanner-2 (SCN2)

(1) Take off the scanner-2 cover.


 P.4-62 "4.5.8 Shading sheet"
(2) Remove 1 flat cable.
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket [1].

Fig. 4-165

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 59
Note:
Before removing the screw, check the posi-
tion on the scale so that you can reinstall it
there.

Fig. 4-166

(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the metal plate


[1].
(5) Take off the scanner-2 [2].

Fig. 4-167

Note:
Before removing the screw, check the posi-
tion on the scale so that you can reinstall it
there.

Fig. 4-168

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 60
Notes:
• Do not touch the scanner-2 fixing screw.
• Handle the scanner carefully since it is a
precision part. Do not push the unit or
touch its board area.

Fig. 4-169

4.5.7 Scan motor (M4)

(1) Take off the board case.


 P.8-1 "8.1.1 Board case"
(2) Loosen 2 screws and take off the belt [1].

Fig. 4-170

(3) Loosen 2 screws.

Fig. 4-171

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 61
(4) Take off the front cover.
 P.4-2 "4.1.2 Upper cover"
(5) Disconnect 1 connector [1] and slide the
scan motor [2] to take it off.

Fig. 4-172

4.5.8 Shading sheet

(1) Take off the scanner cooling fan.


 P.4-93 "4.6.29 Scanner cooling fan (F3)"
(2) Release the harness from the harness
clamp.
(3) Release the latch [2] and take off the scan-
ner-2 cover [1].

Fig. 4-173

Note:
When installing, insert the 2 protrusions of
the scanner-2 cover into the holes of the rear
frame, and engage the 2 hooks in their origi-
nal positions.

Fig. 4-174

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 62
(4) Remove 1 screw, release the latch [1] and
take off the metal plate [2].

Fig. 4-175

(5) Take off the shading sheet [1].

Fig. 4-176

4.5.9 Shading motor (M6)

(1) Take off the board case.


 P.8-1 "8.1.1 Board case"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1], remove 2 screws
and take off the shading motor [2].

Fig. 4-177

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 63
4.5.10 Shading sheet home position sensor (S13)

(1) Take off the board case.


 P.8-1 "8.1.1 Board case"
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the shading
sheet home position sensor together with its
bracket [1].

Fig. 4-178

(3) Disconnect 1 connector [1] and take off the


the shading sheet home position sensor [2].

Fig. 4-179

4.5.11 Left upper cover switch (SW2)

(1) Take off the board case.


 P.8-1 "8.1.1 Board case"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1] and take off the
left upper cover switch [2].

Fig. 4-180

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 64
4.6 Erase Section

4.6.1 Erase unit


Note:
Before disassembling the erase unit, make sure that the temperature of the unit is fully lowered.
If you need to disassemble or replace it while the temperature is still high, be sure to wear
gloves.

4
(1) Open the right lower cover.
(2) Lift up the lever [2] and lower the guide [3].
(3) Lower the levers [4] by pushing them.
Note:
When installing the erase unit, be sure to
push it securely until the levers [4] comes up.

Fig. 4-181

(4) Hold the handles [1] and pull out the erase
unit.
Note:
Pay attention when handling the erase unit
since it will become hot.

Fig. 4-182

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 65
4.6.2 Outside unit cover

(1) Take off the erase unit.


 P.4-65 "4.6.1 Erase unit"
(2) Remove 4 screws and take off the outside [1]
unit cover [1].

Fig. 4-183

4.6.3 Front side cover

(1) Take off the erase unit.


 P.4-65 "4.6.1 Erase unit"
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the lower front [1]
side cover [1].

Fig. 4-184

(3) Remove the E-ring [1].


(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the upper front
side cover [2]. [2]

[1]

Fig. 4-185

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 66
4.6.4 Rear side cover

(1) Take off the erase unit.


 P.4-65 "4.6.1 Erase unit"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the lower rear [1]
side cover [1].

Fig. 4-186

(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the upper rear


side cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-187

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 67
4.6.5 Heat roller-1

(1) Take out the outside unit cover.


 P.4-66 "4.6.2 Outside unit cover" [4] [2] [1]
(2) Take out the front side cover.
 P.4-66 "4.6.3 Front side cover"
(3) Take out the rear side cover.
 P.4-67 "4.6.4 Rear side cover"
(4) Remove the terminal [2] of the heater lamp-2
connected to the thermostat [1].
(5) Release the harness [3] of the heat roller-1
lamp from the harness clamp[4].
Note:
Be sure to confirm that the fixing screw is [3]
tightened securely when the heat roller-1
lamp is installed. If it is not, this may cause
heat generation, spark discharge and fire Fig. 4-188
resulting from contact failure.
(6) Release the harness [2] from the heat roller-
1 lamp front holder [1].
(7) Remove 1 screw and take off the heat roller-
1 lamp front holder [1].

[2]

[1]

Fig. 4-189

(8) Remove the spring hook [1] from the heat


roller-1 at the gear side.
Notes:
• Be careful not to deform the spring hook
by widening it too much when removing
and installing it.
• Be sure to firmly align the spring hook to
the groove of the heat roller-1.

Remark:
[1]
The color of the heater lamp harnesses dif-
fers depending on the model.

Fig. 4-190

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 68
(9) Pull out the heat roller-1 [1] in the direction
indicated by the arrow.
Notes:
• The heat roller-2 is longer than the heat
roller-1.
• Be careful not to deform the heat roller-1.
• When removing the heat roller-1, be care-
ful not to deform the heat roller-1 center
thermistor and the heat roller-1 side ther-
mistor. 4
• When replacing the heat roller-1, adjust
and confirm the gap. [1]
Heat roller-1 center thermostat: 0.5 to 0.7
mm
Heat roller-1 center thermistor: 0.5 to 1.0 Fig. 4-191
mm
Heat roller-1 side thermistor: It should
touch the heat roller-1.
(10) Remove the spring hook [1], gear [2] and the
collar [3] from the heat roller-1.
Notes: [3]
• Be careful not to deform the spring hook
by widening it too much when removing
and installing it.
• Be sure to firmly align the spring hook to [2]
the groove of the heat roller-1.

[1]

Fig. 4-192

4.6.6 Inside unit cover

(1) Take off the lower inside unit cover.


 P.4-83 "4.6.16 Lower inside unit cover"
(2) Remove 2 screws.

Fig. 4-193

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 69
(3) Remove 2 screws.
(4) There are 5 protrusions [2] inside of the top
of the inside unit cover [1] and they are
attached to the metal plate. Slide the inside
unit cover [1] toward you to take it off.

Fig. 4-194

4.6.7 Heat roller-1 lamp / Heat roller-2 lamp (LAMP1 / LAMP2)

(1) Release the harness [2] from the heat roller-


1 lamp rear holder [1].
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the heat roller- [1]
1 lamp rear holder [1].

[2]

Fig. 4-195

(3) Release the harness [2] from the heat roller-


2 lamp rear holder [1]. [1]
(4) Remove 1 screw and take off the heat roller-
2 lamp rear holder [1].

[2]

Fig. 4-196

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 70
(5) Release the harness [1] of the heat roller-1
lamp from the harness clamp[2]. [1]
Remark:
The color of the heater lamp harnesses dif-
fers depending on the model.

[2]

Fig. 4-197

(6) Remove 2 screws. Remove the terminal [2]


of the heater lamp-1 and the terminal [3] of
the heater lamp-2; both are connected to the [2] [1]
heat roller-1 center thermostat [1].
[4]
(7) Release the harness [4] of the heater lamp-1
and the harness [5] of the heater lamp-2 from
the harness clamp.
Note:
Be sure to confirm that the fixing screw is
tightened securely when the heat roller-1
lamp and the heat roller-2 lamp are installed.
[5] [3]
If it is not, this may cause heat generation,
spark discharge and fire resulting from con-
tact failure.
Fig. 4-198

(8) Release the harness [2] from the heat roller-


2 lamp front holder [1]. [2]
(9) Remove 1 screw and take off the heat roller-
2 lamp front holder [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-199

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 71
(10) Release the harness [2] from the heat roller-
1 lamp front holder [1].
(11) Remove 1 screw and take off the heat roller-
1 lamp front holder [1].
[1]

[2]

Fig. 4-200

(12) Push out the drawer connector [1] from the


metal plate [2].

[2]

[1]

Fig. 4-201

(13) Release the harness [1] of the heat roller-2


lamp from the harness clamp.
[2]
(14) Remove 1 screw of the terminal connected
to the heat roller-2 center thermostat [2] and
release the harness [3] from the clamp.

[1] [3]

Fig. 4-202

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 72
(15) Take out the heat roller-1 lamp [1] and the
heat roller-2 lamp [2]. [1]
Note:
The heat roller-1 lamp is 700 W. Check the
mark on the bracket and make sure to install
a 700W lamp.

Remark:
The color of the heater lamp harnesses dif-
fers depending on the model. 4
[2]

Fig. 4-203

4.6.8 Outside unit paper guide

(1) Take off the heat roller-1.


 P.4-68 "4.6.5 Heat roller-1"
(2) Remove 2 bearings [1] from the inside unit.

[1]

Fig. 4-204

(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the outside


unit paper guide [1].
Note:
When removing the outside unit paper guide
[1], be careful not to deform the heat roller-1
center thermistor and the heat roller-1 side
thermistor.

[1]

Fig. 4-205

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 73
4.6.9 Pressure roller-2

(1) Take off the heat roller-1.


 P.4-73 "4.6.8 Outside unit paper guide"
(2) Take off the pressure roller-2 [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-206

Note:
When removing the pressure roller-2 [1], be
careful not to deform the heat roller-1 center
thermistor [2] and the heat roller-1 side ther-
mistor [3].

[3] [2] [1]

Fig. 4-207

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 74
4.6.10 Heat roller-2

(1) Take out the outside unit cover.


 P.4-66 "4.6.2 Outside unit cover" [4] [2] [1]
(2) Take out the frontside cover.
 P.4-66 "4.6.3 Front side cover"
(3) Take out the rearside cover.
 P.4-67 "4.6.4 Rear side cover"
(4) Remove 1 screws. Remove the terminal [2]
of the heater lamp-2 connected to the heat 4
roller-1 center thermostat [1].
(5) Release the harness of the heat roller-2 lamp
[3] from the clamp [4].
Note: [3]
Be sure to confirm that the fixing screw is
tightened securely when the heat roller-1
center thermostat is installed. If it is not, this Fig. 4-208
may cause heat generation, spark discharge
and fire resulting from contact failure.
(6) Push out the drawer connector [1] from the
metal plate [2].

[2]

[1]

Fig. 4-209

(7) Release the harness from the heater lamp-2


front holder [1].
(8) Remove 1 screw and take off the heat roller-
2 lamp front holder [2].

[2]

[1]

Fig. 4-210

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 75
(9) Release the harness from the heater lamp-2
rear holder [1].
(10) Remove 1 screw and take off the heat roller- [1]
2 lamp rear holder [1].

Fig. 4-211

(11) Remove the spring hook [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-212

(12) Pull out the heat roller-2 [1] from the front
side.
Notes:
• The heat roller-2 is longer than the heat
roller-1.
• Be careful not to deform the heat roller-2.
• When removing the heat roller-2, be care-
ful not to deform the heat roller-2 center
thermistor and the heat roller-2 side ther-
mistor.
• When replacing the heat roller-2, adjust
and confirm the gap. [1]
Heat roller-2 center thermostat: 0.5 to 0.7
mm
Heat roller-2 center thermistor: 0.5 to 1.0 Fig. 4-213
mm
Heat roller-2 side thermistor: It should
touch the heat roller-2.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 76
(13) Remove the spring hook [1], washer [2] and
the collar [3] from the heat roller-2.
Notes: [3]
• Be careful not to deform the spring hook
by widening it too much when removing
and installing it.
• Be sure to firmly align the spring hook to [2]
the groove of the heat roller-2.

4
[1]

Fig. 4-214

4.6.11 Inside unit paper guide

(1) Take off the heat roller-2.


 P.4-75 "4.6.10 Heat roller-2"
(2) Remove 2 screws of the inside unit paper
guide [1].
Note:
When removing the inside unit paper guide
[1], be careful not to deform the heat roller-1
center thermistor and the heat roller-1 side
thermistor.

[1]

Fig. 4-215

(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the heat roller-


2 center thermistor [1].
(4) Release the harness of the heat roller-1/2
lamp from the harness clamp.

[1]

Fig. 4-216

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 77
(5) Remove 2 screws of the heat roller-2 center
thermostat [1].
Note:
Be sure to confirm that the fixing screw is
tightened securely when the heat roller-2
center thermostat is installed. If it is not, this [1]
may cause heat generation, spark discharge
and fire resulting from contact failure.

Fig. 4-217

(6) Remove 2 screws and take off the inside unit


paper guide [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-218

4.6.12 Pressure roller-1

(1) Take off the inside unit paper guide.


 P.4-77 "4.6.11 Inside unit paper guide"
(2) Remove 3 screws of the lower inside unit [1]
cover [1].
(3) Take off the lower inside unit cover [1] to the
front side.

Fig. 4-219

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 78
(4) Take off the pressure roller-1.

[1]
4

Fig. 4-220

Note:
When removing the pressure roller-1, be
careful not to deform the heat roller-2 side
thermistor [1].
[1]

Fig. 4-221

4.6.13 Heat roller-2 center thermistor (THMS3) / Heat roller-2 side


thermistor (THMS4)

(1) Take off the heat roller-2.


 P.4-75 "4.6.10 Heat roller-2"
(2) Take off the inside unit cover.
 P.4-69 "4.6.6 Inside unit cover"
(3) Remove 1 screw and the holder [1]. [1]
(4) Release the harness of the heat roller-2 cen-
ter thermistor from the harness clamp [2].

[2]

Fig. 4-222

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 79
(5) Remove 1 screw and take off the heat roller-
2 center thermistor [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-223

(6) Disconnect the connector and release the


harness of the heat roller-2 side thermistor
[1] from the clamp. [1]

Fig. 4-224

(7) Take off the pressure roller-1.


 P.4-78 "4.6.12 Pressure roller-1"
(8) Remove 1 screw and take off the heat roller-
2 side thermistor [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-225

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 80
(9) Take off the heat roller-2 center thermistor [1]
and the heat roller-2 side thermistor [2].
[2]
Notes:
• When installing, make sure that the gap
between the heat roller-2 center ther-
mistor and the heat roller-2 is 0.5 to 1.0
mm.
• When installing, make sure that the heat
roller-2 touches the heat roller-2 side
thermistor. 4
• Be careful not to deform the thermistor
[1]
when installing it.

Fig. 4-226

4.6.14 Heat roller-2 center thermostat (THMO2)

(1) Take off the inside unit cover.


 P.4-69 "4.6.6 Inside unit cover"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the heat
roller-2 center thermostat [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-227

Notes:
• When installing, adjust the gap between [2]
the heat roller-2 center thermostat [1] and
the heat roller-2 [2] while loosening the 2
screws.
• When installing, make sure that the gap
between the heat roller-2 center thermo-
stat [1] and the heat roller-2 [2] is 0.5 to
0.7 mm. [1]
• Be sure to confirm that the fixing screw is
tightened securely when the heat roller-2
center thermostat [1] is installed. If it is
not, this may cause heat generation,
spark discharge and fire resulting from
contact failure. Fig. 4-228

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 81
4.6.15 Inside unit separation finger

(1) Take off the inside unit cover.


 P.4-69 "4.6.6 Inside unit cover"
(2) Remove 1 screw from the inside unit separa-
tion finger. 4 separation fingers are attached
to the inside unit cover.

Fig. 4-229

(3) Remove the spring [1] and take off the inside
unit separation finger [2].
[2]

[1]

Fig. 4-230

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 82
Notes:
• Attach the inside unit separation finger [1]
by hooking it with the spring [3] so that the
inside unit [2] is held between them.

[1]

[3] 4
[2]

Fig. 4-231

• The roller position in the inside unit sepa-


ration finger differs for the 2 front and the
2 rear sides.

Fig. 4-232

4.6.16 Lower inside unit cover

(1) Divide the erase unit into the inside unit and
the outside unit.
 P.4-84 "4.6.18 Inside unit / Outside unit"
(2) Remove 3 screws of the inside unit.
(3) Take off the lower inside unit cover [1] to the
front side.

Fig. 4-233

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 83
4.6.17 Outside unit separation fingers

(1) Take off the outside unit paper guide.


 P.4-73 "4.6.8 Outside unit paper guide"
(2) Remove 2 screws and the holder [1].
Note:
When removing the holder [1], be careful not
to deform the heat roller-1 center thermistor
[2] and the heat roller-1 side thermistor [3].

Fig. 4-234

(3) Remove the spring [1] and take off the out-
side unit separation finger [2].
Note:
Attach the outside unit separation fingers to 4
places.

Fig. 4-235

4.6.18 Inside unit / Outside unit

(1) Take off the outside unit cover.


 P.4-66 "4.6.2 Outside unit cover"
(2) Take off the upper front side cover and the
lower front side cover.
 P.4-66 "4.6.3 Front side cover"
(3) Take off the upper rear side cover and the
lower rear side cover.
 P.4-67 "4.6.4 Rear side cover"
(4) Remove the E-ring [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-236

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 84
(5) Push out the drawer connector [1] from the
metal plate [2].

Fig. 4-237

(6) Disconnect the connector [1] from the drawer


connector.
(7) Remove 1 screw.
(8) Take off the harness holder [2].
(9) Release the harness from the harness holder
[2].
(10) Remove the E-ring [3].

Fig. 4-238

(11) Remove 3 screws and slide the lower out-


side unit cover [1] to the gear side to take it
off.

Fig. 4-239

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 85
(12) Pull the shaft [1] straight out. Divide the
erase unit into the inside unit [2] and the out-
side unit [3].
(13) Remove 2 springs [4].

Fig. 4-240

Notes:
• When installing, make sure that the gear [2]
[1] of the inside unit and the gear [2] of
the outside one are engaged properly. If
not, these units cannot be assembled.
• There are grooves for the E-ring on the
shaft. Install it so that 2 grooves come to
the front and 3 grooves to the gear side.

[1]

Fig. 4-241

4.6.19 Drive gear unit

(1) Take off the inside unit cover.


 P.4-69 "4.6.6 Inside unit cover"
(2) Remove 1 screw with a washer [1].
(3) Remove 2 screws [2].
(4) Take off the drive gear unit [3].

Fig. 4-242

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 86
4.6.20 Paper guide roller

(1) Divide the erase unit into the inside unit and
the outside unit.
 P.4-84 "4.6.18 Inside unit / Outside unit"
(2) Remove 3 screws of the outside unit and
take off the paper guide roller [1].

Fig. 4-243

4.6.21 Heat roller-1 center thermistor (THMS1)

(1) Take off the pressure roller-2.


 P.4-74 "4.6.9 Pressure roller-2"
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the heat roller-
1 center thermistor [1].
Notes:
• When installing, make sure that the gap
between the heat roller-1 center ther-
mistor and the heat roller-1 is 0.5 to 1.0
mm.
• Be careful not to deform the thermistor
when installing it.

Fig. 4-244

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 87
4.6.22 Heat roller-1 side thermistor (THMS2)

(1) Take off the pressure roller-2.


 P.4-74 "4.6.9 Pressure roller-2"
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the heat roller-
1 side thermistor [1].
Notes:
• When installing, make sure that the heat
roller-1 touches the heat roller-1 side
thermistor.
• Be careful not to deform the thermistor
when installing it.

Fig. 4-245

4.6.23 Heat roller-1 center thermostat (THMO1)

(1) Take off the pressure roller-2.


 P.4-74 "4.6.9 Pressure roller-2"
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the heat roller-
1 center thermostat [1].
Notes:
• When installing, make sure that the gap
between the heat roller-1 center thermo-
stat [1] and the heat roller-1 is 0.5 to 0.7
mm.
• Be sure to confirm that the fixing screw is
tightened securely when the thermostat is
installed. If it is not, this may cause heat
generation, spark discharge and fire
resulting from contact failure.
Fig. 4-246

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 88
4.6.24 Erase unit entrance sensor (S16)

(1) Take off the board case.


 P.8-1 "8.1.1 Board case"
(2) Take off the erase unit.
 P.4-65 "4.6.1 Erase unit"
(3) Take off the front cover.
 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(4) Remove 5 screws and take off the holder unit
[1]. 4

Fig. 4-247

(5) Remove 1 screw.

Fig. 4-248

(6) Remove the stay [1] by turning it from the


front side.
(7) Disconnect 1 connector [2] from the stay.
(8) Take off the erase unit entrance sensor [3].

Fig. 4-249

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 89
4.6.25 Erase unit exit sensor (S17)

(1) Take off the heater cooling fan.


 P.4-45 "4.4.7 Heater cooling fan (F2)"
(2) Remove 1 screw.

Fig. 4-250

(3) Take off the board case.


 P.8-1 "8.1.1 Board case"
(4) Remove 1 screw.

Fig. 4-251

(5) Remove the stay [1] by turning it from the


front side.
(6) Disconnect 1 connector [2] from the stay.
(7) Take off the erase unit exit sensor [3].

Fig. 4-252

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 90
4.6.26 Right lower cover switch (SW4)

(1) Open the right lower cover.


(2) Take off the right rear cover.
 P.4-10 "4.1.9 Right rear cover"
(3) Release the latch and take off the right lower
cover switch [1].

Fig. 4-253

(4) Disconnect 1 connector [1].

Fig. 4-254

4.6.27 Right upper cover switch (SW5)

(1) Open the right upper cover.


(2) Release the latch and take off the right lower
cover switch [1].

Fig. 4-255

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 91
(3) Disconnect 1 connector [1].

Fig. 4-256

4.6.28 Paper cooling fan-1 (F1)

(1) Take off the right upper cover.


 P.4-12 "4.1.12 Right upper cover"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the duct [1].

Fig. 4-257

(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the paper


cooling fan-1 [2].

Fig. 4-258

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 92
4.6.29 Scanner cooling fan (F3)

(1) Take off the front cover.


 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1], remove 3 screws
and take off the duct [2].

Fig. 4-259

(3) Remove 2 screws.


(4) Release the harness from the harness guide,
and take off the paper cooling fan-3 [1].

Fig. 4-260

4.6.30 Erase unit motor (M7)

(1) Take off the board case.


 P.8-1 "8.1.1 Board case"
(2) Release the harness from 6 harness clamps.

Fig. 4-261

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 93
(3) Loosen 2 screws and take off the belt [1].

Fig. 4-262

(4) Remove 1 clip [1], 1 pulley [2] and 1 pin.

Fig. 4-263

(5) Remove 3 screws.

Fig. 4-264

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 94
(6) Take off the front cover.
 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(7) Slide the erase unit motor unit [1] to take it
off.
Note:
When taking off the unit, be careful not to
drop the heater transport clutch (CLT1).

Fig. 4-265

(8) Disconnect 1 connector [1], remove 2 screws


and take off the erase unit motor [2].

Fig. 4-266

4.6.31 Heater transport clutch (CLT1)

(1) Take off the erase unit motor.


 P.4-93 "4.6.30 Erase unit motor (M7)"
(2) Take off the heater transport clutch (CLT1).

Fig. 4-267

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 95
Note:
When installing, engage the stopper with the
protrusion.

Fig. 4-268

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 96
4.7 Paper Exit Section

4.7.1 Exit path sensor (S12)

(1) Take off the left center cover.


 P.4-7 "4.1.5 Left center cover"
(2) Remove 3 screws and take off the cover.
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the exit path
sensor bracket [1]. 4

Fig. 4-269

(4) Disconnect 1 connector, release the latch


and take off the exit path sensor [1].

Fig. 4-270

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 97
4.7.2 Exit path roller

(1) Take off the board case.


 P.8-1 "8.1.1 Board case"
(2) Loosen 2 screws and take off the belt [1].

Fig. 4-271

(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the metal plate


[1].

Fig. 4-272

(4) Remove 1 clip [1] and 1 bushing [2] on the


front side.

Fig. 4-273

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 98
(5) Take off the exit path roller [1] from the rear
side.

Fig. 4-274

(6) Remove 1 E-ring, 1 pulley, 1 pin, 1 E-ring


and 1 bearing in this order from the rear side
of the exit path roller.

Fig. 4-275

4.7.3 Reuse drawer aligning roller lift motor (M9)

(1) Take off the power supply board case.


 P.8-3 "8.1.6 Power supply board case"
(2) Disconnect 2 connectors [1]. Remove 2
screws.
(3) Take off the spring [2].

[2]

[1]

Fig. 4-276

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 99
(4) Remove 1 clip [1]. Take out the reuse drawer
aligning roller lift motor with its bracket [2].
[1] [2]

Fig. 4-277

(5) Remove the E-ring [1]. Remove 1 screw and


take off the bracket [2]. [1]

[2]

Fig. 4-278

(6) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket [1].


Take off the gear unit [2] from the bracket.
[2]

[1]

Fig. 4-279

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 100
(7) Remove 2 screws and take off the reuse
drawer aligning roller lift motor [2] from the
bracket [1]. [2]
Note:
Make sure the size and length of the screws
are correct. If they are not, the motor could
be damaged.

4
[1]

Fig. 4-280

Note:
When installing the reuse drawer aligning
roller lift motor unit [1], align the shaft of the [1]
arm to the groove on the equipment.

Fig. 4-281

4.7.4 Reuse drawer aligning roller position sensor (S27)

(1) Take off the power supply board case.


 P.8-3 "8.1.6 Power supply board case"
(2) Disconnect 2 connectors [1]. Remove 2
screws.
(3) Take off the spring [2].

[2]

[1]

Fig. 4-282

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 101
(4) Remove 1 clip [1]. Take out the reuse drawer
aligning roller lift motor with its bracket [2].
[1] [2]

Fig. 4-283

(5) Remove the E-ring [1]. Remove 1 screw and


take off the bracket [2]. [1]

[2]

Fig. 4-284

(6) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket [1].


Take off the gear unit [2] from the bracket.
[2]

[1]

Fig. 4-285

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 102
(7) Release the latch and take off the reuse
drawer aligning roller position sensor [1] from
[1]
the bracket.

Fig. 4-286

Note:
When installing the reuse drawer aligning
roller lift motor unit [1], align the shaft of the [1]
arm to the groove on the equipment.

Fig. 4-287

4.7.5 Reuse drawer sensor (S24)

(1) Take off the reuse drawer and the reject


drawer.
(2) Take off the power supply board case.
 P.8-3 "8.1.6 Power supply board case"
(3) Disconnect 1 connector, release the latch
and take off the reuse drawer sensor [1].

Fig. 4-288

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 103
4.7.6 Reuse drawer exit roller

(1) Take off the reuse drawer and the reject


drawer.
 P.4-125 "4.7.20 Reuse drawer"
 P.4-125 "4.7.21 Reject drawer"
(2) Take off the power supply board case.
 P.8-3 "8.1.6 Power supply board case"
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the cover [4].

Fig. 4-289

(4) Remove 1 clip [1] and 1 bushing [2].

Fig. 4-290

(5) Loosen 2 screws and take off the belt [1].


(6) Remove 1 clip [2], 1 gear [3] and 1 pin.

Fig. 4-291

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 104
(7) Remove 1 clip [1], 1 pulley [2] and 1 pin.

Fig. 4-292

(8) Move the bearing [1] to the rear side. Slide


the shaft [2] to take it off.

Fig. 4-293

(9) Remove 2 E-rings, 2 flanges and 2 pins from


the reuse drawer exit roller.

Fig. 4-294

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 105
4.7.7 Reuse drawer exit motor (M8)

(1) Take off the power supply board case.


 P.8-3 "8.1.6 Power supply board case"
(2) Loosen 2 screws and take off the belt [1].

Fig. 4-295

(3) Loosen 2 screws.

Fig. 4-296

(4) Take off the reuse drawer and the reject


drawer.
(5) Remove 1 screw and the stay [1].

Fig. 4-297

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 106
(6) Disconnect 1 connector and slide the reuse
drawer exit motor [1] to take it off.

Fig. 4-298

4.7.8 Drawer base metal plate

(1) Take off the power supply board case.


 P.8-3 "8.1.6 Power supply board case"
(2) Take off the right lower cover.
 P.4-10 "4.1.10 Right lower cover"
(3) Take off the reuse drawer and the reject
drawer.
 P.4-125 "4.7.20 Reuse drawer"
 P.4-125 "4.7.21 Reject drawer"
(4) Remove 1 screw and the stay [1].

Fig. 4-299

(5) Remove 4 screws and take off the drawer


base metal plate [1].

Fig. 4-300

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 107
Fig. 4-301

Fig. 4-302

Fig. 4-303

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 108
4.7.9 Sensor holder

(1) Take off the drawer base metal plate.


 P.4-107 "4.7.8 Drawer base metal plate"
(2) Release the harness [1] from the connector
and the harness clamp.

Fig. 4-304

(3) Remove 1 screw and the sensor holder [1].

Fig. 4-305

4.7.10 5th transport sensor

(1) Remove the sensor holder.


 P.4-109 "4.7.9 Sensor holder"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector, release the latch
and take off the 5th transport sensor [1].

Fig. 4-306

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 109
4.7.11 5th transport roller

(1) Take off the drawer base metal plate.


 P.4-107 "4.7.8 Drawer base metal plate"
(2) Loosen 2 screws and take off the belt [1].

Fig. 4-307

(3) Remove 1 clip [1], 1 pulley [2] and 1 pin.


Slide the bearing.

Fig. 4-308

(4) Remove 1 clip [1] and 1 bushing [2].

Fig. 4-309

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 110
(5) Slide the 5th transport roller to take it off.

Fig. 4-310

4.7.12 6th transport sensor (S26)

(1) Remove the sensor holder.


 P.4-109 "4.7.9 Sensor holder"
(2) Disconnect the connector, release the latch
and take off the 6th transport sensor [1].

Fig. 4-311

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 111
4.7.13 Reject drawer sensor (S25)

(1) Take off the reuse drawer and the reject


drawer.
 P.4-125 "4.7.20 Reuse drawer"
 P.4-125 "4.7.21 Reject drawer"
(2) Take off the power supply board case.
 P.8-3 "8.1.6 Power supply board case"
(3) Disconnect 1 connector, release the latch
and take off the reject drawer sensor [1].

Fig. 4-312

4.7.14 Reject drawer paper full sensor (S23)

(1) Remove the sensor holder.


 P.4-109 "4.7.9 Sensor holder"
(2) Remove the lever [1], the spring [2] and the
actuator [3].

Fig. 4-313

(3) Disconnect the connector, release the latch


and take off the reject drawer paper full sen-
sor [1].

Fig. 4-314

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 112
4.7.15 Reject drawer exit roller

(1) Take off the drawer base metal plate.


 P.4-107 "4.7.8 Drawer base metal plate"
(2) Remove 1 screw and the holder [1].

Fig. 4-315

(3) Release the harness [1] from the connector


and the harness clamp.

Fig. 4-316

(4) Remove 1 clip [1] and 1 bushing [2].

Fig. 4-317

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 113
(5) Remove 1 clip, 1 collar, 1 gear and 1 pin [1].

Fig. 4-318

(6) Remove the collar [1] and slide the bearing


[2].

Fig. 4-319

(7) Slide the reject drawer exit roller [1] to take it


off.

Fig. 4-320

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 114
(8) Remove 2 E-rings [1], 2 collars [2], 2 pins [3]
and 1 bearing [4] from the reject drawer exit
roller.

Fig. 4-321

4.7.16 Reject drawer gate solenoid (SOL2)

(1) Take off the front cover.


( P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover")
(2) Take off the reuse drawer and the reject
drawer.
 P.4-125 "4.7.20 Reuse drawer"
 P.4-125 "4.7.21 Reject drawer"
(3) Disconnect 1 connector [1]. Remove 2
screws and take off the reject drawer gate
solenoid [2] with the bracket.
Note:
Before taking off the bracket, check the posi-
tion on the scale so that you can reinstall it
there.

Fig. 4-322

(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the reject


drawer gate solenoid [1] from the bracket.

Fig. 4-323

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 115
4.7.17 Left lower cover switch (SW6)

(1) Take off the left rear cover.


( P.4-9 "4.1.8 Left rear cover")
(2) Open the left lower cover.
(3) Remove the power supply board case.
 P.8-3 "8.1.6 Power supply board case"
(4) Remove 1 screw and slide the switch bracket
[1] to the inside.

Fig. 4-324

(5) Disconnect 2 Faston terminals. Remove 2


screws and take off the left lower cover
switch [1].

Fig. 4-325

4.7.18 Reuse drawer aligning roller

(1) Take off the right center cover.


 P.4-11 "4.1.11 Right center cover"
(2) Take off the power supply board case.
 P.8-3 "8.1.6 Power supply board case"
(3) Remove 1 screw at the rear side.

Fig. 4-326

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 116
(4) Remove 3 screws at the front side.

Fig. 4-327

(5) While lifting the rear side of the plate [1] up,
take it off toward the right-hand side.

Fig. 4-328

(6) Remove 1 clip [2] and 1 bushing [3] at the


front side.

Fig. 4-329

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 117
(7) Remove 1 clip [4] and 1 gear [5] at the rear
side.

Fig. 4-330

(8) Remove 1 pin [6], 1 collar [7] and 1 bushing


[8].

Fig. 4-331

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 118
(9) Slide the aligning roller unit [9] to the front
side and remove the rear shaft. Then slide
the unit to the rear side to take it off.

Fig. 4-332

Fig. 4-333
Note:
When installing the unit, confirm that the dis-
charge brush is straightened. If the tip of the
discharge brush is caught by another part,
be sure to make it straighten.

Fig. 4-334

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 119
Note:
When installing the unit, match the protrud-
ing portion and holder.[10]
Place the arm on the slide plate guide. [11]

Fig. 4-335

(10) Remove 2 clips [12].

Fig. 4-336

(11) Remove 1 bushing [13] at the rear side.

Fig. 4-337

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 120
(12) Release the belt [14] from the pulley.
(13) Remove 1 pulley [15], 1 pin [16] and 1 bush-
ing [17].
(14) Lift up the aligning roller together with the
shaft.

Fig. 4-338

(15) Remove 1 pin [19] and 1 shaft [20] from the


aligning roller [18].

Fig. 4-339

4.7.19 Reuse drawer paper full sensor (S21) / Reuse drawer entrance
sensor (S20)

(1) Take off the drawer aligning roller unit.


 P.4-116 "4.7.18 Reuse drawer aligning
roller"
(2) Cut 1 harness clamp [1] at the rear side. Dis-
connect 2 connectors [2]. Release the har-
ness from the harness clamp [3]. Pass the
harness through the hole [4] in the frame to
the front side.

Fig. 4-340

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 121
(3) Remove 1 screw at the front side. Discon-
nect 1 connector [1].

Fig. 4-341

(4) Slide the sensor guide [6] to the front side.


While rotating the rear side of the sensor
guide clockwise, take it off.

Fig. 4-342

(5) Take off the sensor guide.

Fig. 4-343

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 122
Note:
When installing, be sure to align the levers
[16] and [17] to the correct position as shown
in the figure.

Fig. 4-344

(6) Remove 1 screw and take off the plate [7].

Fig. 4-345

(7) Remove 1 screw and take off the stay [8].

Fig. 4-346

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 123
(8) Remove the shaft of the actuator [12] from
the holder [10]. Remove the actuators [11]
and [12].

Fig. 4-347

(9) Disconnect 1connector [12]. Remove the


reuse drawer paper full sensor [13].

Fig. 4-348

(10) Disconnect 1connector [14]. Remove the


reuse drawer entrance sensor [15].

Fig. 4-349

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 124
4.7.20 Reuse drawer

(1) Pull out the reuse drawer [1].

Fig. 4-350

(2) While holding the right rail [2] so that it does


not move, push the left rail [3] and the reuse
drawer [1] into the end.
(3) While lifting the right and left rails up, pull out
the reuse drawer [1].

Fig. 4-351

4.7.21 Reject drawer

(1) Pull out the reject drawer [1].


(2) While lifting the right and left rails [2] up, take
off the reject drawer [1].

Fig. 4-352

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 125
4.8 Ink printer

4.8.1 Ink printer board

(1) Take off the left center cover.


 P.4-7 "4.1.5 Left center cover"
(2) Attach the removed cover shaft (front) [1]
and secure it with a screw.

Fig. 4-353

(3) Remove 3 screws and take off the cover [1].

Fig. 4-354

(4) Disconnect 1 connector [1]. Hold down the


stopper and disconnect the flat cable [3].
Remove 2 screws and take off the ink printer
board [4].

Fig. 4-355

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 126
Note:
Do not touch the 2 screws shown with the
arrows when replacing the ink printer board.

Fig. 4-356

4.8.2 Ink pad

(1) Take off the front cover.


 P.4-1 "4.1.1 Front cover"
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the bracket [2]
of the ink pad from the window at the right-
hand side [1].

Fig. 4-357

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 127
e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
4 - 128
5. SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

5.1 Overview
[A] Starting self-diagnosis mode
1. Turn the power ON.
2. When the status screen appears, press the [MENU/OFF], [UP] and [OK] buttons simultaneously
until the self-diagnosis mode screen is displayed (approx. 5 seconds).
3. Enter the authentication code.
001001
4. Enter a 4-digit code for the desired mode with the arrow buttons and press the [OK] button.
5. To change the adjustment or setting value, enter the test number and value with the arrow buttons. 5
Then press the [OK] button to set the value.
Note:
Be sure to close all covers before starting self-diagnosis mode.

[B] Exiting from each mode


Press the [HOME] button to clear the self-diagnosis mode. (Press the [CANCEL] button to return to the
previous menu.)

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-1
5.2 Input/output check test
This checks the status of the input/output signals.

1. Press the [MENU], [UP] and [OK] buttons simultaneously to enter the self-diagnosis mode.
2. Enter the authentication code (001001).
3. Enter a 4-digit code for the desired test number with the arrow buttons.
4. Press the [OK] button.
- Sensor check: "0" (sensor OFF) or "1" (sensor ON) is displayed on the LCD by detecting the sen-
sor status.
- Output check such as a motor: The operation is started or stopped.
5. To clear the test number input in step 3. press the [CANCEL] button.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-2
Test
Category Name Symbol Contents
number
1001 Sensor Feed tray paper sensor S1 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
check remains
1002 Front paper pull-up sensor S2 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1003 Rear paper pull-up sensor S3 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1004 Feed sensor S4 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1005 Front skew sensor S5 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
5
1006 Rear skew sensor S6 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1007 Registration sensor S8 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1011 Scanner entrance sensor S10 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1012 Scanner exit sensor S11 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1013 Exit path sensor S12 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1021 1st transport sensor S14 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1022 2nd transport sensor S15 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1023 Erase unit entrance sensor S16 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1024 Erase unit exit sensor S17 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1025 3rd transport sensor S18 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1026 4th transport sensor S19 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1031 Reuse drawer entrance S20 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
sensor remains
1032 Reuse drawer paper full S21 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
sensor remains
1033 5th transport sensor S22 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1034 Reject drawer paper full S23 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
sensor remains
1035 Reuse drawer sensor S24 0: Drawer not installed, 1: Drawer
installed
1036 Reject drawer sensor S25 0: Drawer not installed, 1: Drawer
installed
1038 6th transport sensor S26 0: No paper remains, 1: Paper
remains
1041 Paper feed cover switch SW1 0: Cover opened, 1: Cover closed
1042 Left upper cover switch SW2 0: Cover opened, 1: Cover closed
1043 Left center cover switch SW3 0: Cover opened, 1: Cover closed
1044 Right lower cover switch SW4 0: Cover opened, 1: Cover closed
1045 Right upper cover switch SW5 0: Cover opened, 1: Cover closed
1046 Left lower cover switch SW6 0: Cover opened, 1: Cover closed

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-3
Test
Category Name Symbol Contents
number
2001 Motor ON Feed motor ON M1 Drives the feed motor.
2002 Separation motor ON M2 Drives the separation motor.
2003 Pick-up roller movement M3 Drives the pick-up roller movement
motor ON motor.
2004 Scan motor ON M4 Drives the scan motor.
2005 Speed adjustment motor ON M5 Drives the speed adjustment motor.
2006 Erase unit motor ON M7 Drives the erase unit motor.
2007 Reuse drawer exit motor ON M8 Drives the reuse drawer exit motor.
2008 Reuse drawer aligning roller M9 Drives the reuse drawer aligning
lift motor ON roller lift motor.
2009 Shading motor ON M6 Drives the shading motor.
2051 Motor OFF Feed motor OFF M1 Stops the feed motor.
2052 Separation motor OFF M2 Stops the separation motor.
2053 Pick-up roller movement M3 Stops the pick-up roller movement
motor OFF motor.
2054 Scan motor OFF M4 Stops the scan motor.
2055 Speed adjustment motor OFF M5 Stops the speed adjustment motor.
2056 Erase unit motor OFF M7 Stops the erase unit motor.
2057 Reuse drawer exit motor OFF M8 Stops the reuse drawer exit motor.
2058 Reuse drawer aligning roller M9 Stops the reuse drawer aligning roller
lift motor OFF lift motor.
2059 Shading motor OFF M6 Stops the shading motor.
3001 Solenoid Heater gate solenoid ON SOL1 Repeats ON every 500 msec. at the
ON transport side and exit side alter-
nately.
3003 Reject drawer gate solenoid SOL2 Repeats ON for 500 msec. and OFF
ON for 1500 msec.
3051 Solenoid Heater gate solenoid OFF SOL1 Stops the heater gate solenoid.
3053 OFF Reject drawer gate solenoid SOL2 Stops the reject drawer gate solenoid.
OFF
5003 Heater Heater continuous test ON - Repeats turning ON the lamps in the
ON/OFF heat roller-1 and -2 for 1 min. and
OFF for 2 min.
5053 Heater continuous test OFF - Finishes the heater continuous test.
6010 Communi- Communication test Performs the communication test between the
cation test main and scanner boards for 3 sec. (Stopped auto-
matically)

Note:
After performing "Test ON" for the motor, solenoid or fan test, be sure to enter the test number of
"Test OFF" to stop the test.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-4
Test
Category Name Contents
number
7000 Series of Erase and exit to the reuse drawer When paper is inserted: Erases its images
operation ON ON and outputs it to the reuse drawer.
7001 Erase and exit to the reject drawer When paper is inserted: Erases its images
ON and outputs it to the reject drawer.
7010 Dummy-scan, erase and exit to When paper is inserted: Scans, erases its
the reuse drawer ON images and outputs it to the reuse drawer.
(Dummy-operation)
7011 Dummy-scan, erase and exit to When paper is inserted: Scans, erases its
the reject drawer ON images and outputs it to the reject drawer.
(Dummy-operation)
7020 Dummy-scan, erase, dummy-sort When paper is inserted: Scans, erases its 5
and exit to the reuse drawer ON images, sorts and outputs it to the reuse
drawer.
(Dummy-operation)
7021 Dummy-scan, erase, dummy-sort When paper is inserted: Scans, erases its
and exit to the reject drawer ON images, sorts and outputs it to the reject
drawer.
(Dummy-operation)
7030 Dummy-scan and exit to the reuse When paper is inserted: Scans and out-
drawer ON puts it to the reuse drawer. (Dummy-oper-
ation)
7031 Dummy-scan and exit to the reject When paper is inserted: Scans and out-
drawer ON puts it to the reject drawer. (Dummy-opera-
tion)
7050 Series of Erase and exit to the reuse drawer Stops test number 7000.
operation OFF
7051 OFF Erase and exit to the reject drawer Stops test number 7001.
OFF
7060 Dummy-scan, erase and exit to Stops test number 7010.
the reuse drawer OFF
7061 Dummy-scan, erase and exit to Stops test number 7011.
the reject drawer OFF
7070 Dummy-scan, erase, dummy-sort Stops test number 7020.
and exit to the reuse drawer OFF
7071 Dummy-scan, erase, dummy-sort Stops test number 7021.
and exit to the reject drawer OFF
7080 Dummy-scan and exit to the reuse Stops test number 7030.
drawer OFF
7081 Dummy-scan and exit to the reject Stops test number 7031.
drawer OFF

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-5
Test
Category Name Contents
number
7201 Ink printer test Ink printer 1st position and reuse Prints on the 1st position of a sheet of
the drawer paper and outputs it to the reuse drawer.
7202 Ink printer 2nd position and reuse Prints on the 2nd position of a sheet of
the drawer paper and outputs it to the reuse drawer.
7203 Ink printer 3rd position and reuse Prints on the 3rd position of a sheet of
the drawer paper and outputs it to the reuse drawer.
7204 Ink printer 4th position and reuse Prints on the 4th position of a sheet of
the drawer paper and outputs it to the reuse drawer.
7205 Ink printer 5th position and reuse Prints on the 5th position of a sheet of
the drawer paper and outputs it to the reuse drawer.
7206 Ink printer 6th position and reuse Prints on the 6th position of a sheet of
the drawer paper and outputs it to the reuse drawer.
7207 Ink printer 7th position and reuse Prints on the 7th position of a sheet of
the drawer paper and outputs it to the reuse drawer.
7208 Ink printer 8th position and reuse Prints on the 8th position of a sheet of
the drawer paper and outputs it to the reuse drawer.
7209 Ink printer 9th position and reuse Prints on the 9th position of a sheet of
the drawer paper and outputs it to the reuse drawer.
7210 Ink printer 10th position and reuse Prints on the 10th position of a sheet of
the drawer paper and outputs it to the reuse drawer.
7211 Ink printer 1st to 10th Prints on the 1st to 10th positions of a
positions and the reuse drawer sheet of paper and outputs it to the reuse
drawer.
8000 Aging ON Erase and exit to the reuse drawer When paper is inserted: Erases and out-
ON puts it to the reuse drawer. (Dummy-oper-
ation)
8001 Erase and exit to the reject drawer When paper is inserted: Erases and out-
ON puts it to the reject drawer. (Dummy-opera-
tion)
8010 Dummy-scan, erase and exit to When paper is inserted: Scans, erases
the reuse drawer ON and outputs it to the reuse drawer.
(Dummy-operation)
8011 Dummy-scan, erase and exit to When paper is inserted: Scans, erases
the reject drawer ON and outputs it to the reject drawer.
(Dummy-operation)
8020 Dummy-scan, erase, dummy-sort When paper is inserted: Scans, erases,
and exit to the reuse drawer ON sort and outputs it to the reuse drawer.
(Dummy-operation)
8021 Dummy-scan, erase, dummy-sort When paper is inserted: Scans, erases,
and exit to the reject drawer ON sort and outputs it to the reject drawer.
(Dummy-operation)
8030 Aging ON Dummy-scan and exit to the reuse When paper is inserted: Scans, erases
drawer ON and outputs it to the reuse drawer.
(Dummy-operation)
8031 Dummy-scan and exit to the reject When paper is inserted: Scans, erases
drawer ON and outputs it to the reject drawer.
(Dummy-operation)

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-6
Test
Category Name Contents
number
8050 Aging OFF Erase and exit to the reuse drawer Stops test number 8000.
OFF
8051 Erase and exit to the reject drawer Stops test number 8001.
OFF
8060 Dummy-scan, erase and exit to Stops test number 8010.
the reuse drawer OFF
8061 Dummy-scan, erase and exit to Stops test number 8011.
the reject drawer OFF
8070 Dummy-scan, erase, dummy-sort Stops test number 8020.
and exit to the reuse drawer OFF
8071 Dummy-scan, erase, dummy-sort Stops test number 8021. 5
and exit to the reject drawer OFF
8080 Dummy-scan and exit to the reuse Stops test number 8030.
drawer OFF
8081 Dummy-scan and exit to the reject Stops test number 8031.
drawer OFF
9002 Paper transport speed Selects the transport speed of a series of
selection operations in the aging test.
Default value: 2 (200 dpi)
1:100 dpi, 2:200 dpi, 3:300 dpi

Notes:
• After performing "Test ON" for the aging test, be sure to enter the test number of "Test OFF" to
stop the test.
• The operation flow of the ink printer test is as follows:
Only one sheet of paper set on the feeding tray is fed.
Printing in a specified position is performed.
Processed paper is output to the reuse drawer.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-7
5.3 Adjustment
This adjusts various items.

Test
Category Name Contents
number
1103 Transport Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(A4) tration amount becomes. The smaller the
(Plain paper) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.
Default value: 9
Acceptable value: 1 to 15
1104 Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(B5) tration amount becomes. The smaller the
(Plain paper) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.
Default value: 5
Acceptable value: 1 to 15
1105 Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(A5/ST) tration amount becomes. The smaller the
(Plain paper) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.
Default value: 4
Acceptable value: 1 to 15
1106 Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(LT) tration amount becomes. The smaller the
(Plain paper) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.
Default value: 9
Acceptable value: 1 to 15

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-8
Test
Category Name Contents
number
1109 Setting of the paper type Sets the paper type to be transported.
0 : Plain paper
1 : Media 1
2 : Media 2
3 : Media 3
Default value: 0
Acceptable value: 0 to 3
The registration amount adjusted in the test
numbers 1103 to 1106 and 1123 to 1146 is
reflected corresponding to this paper type
setting.
1123 Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(A4) tration amount becomes. The smaller the 5
(Media 1) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.
Default value: 3
Acceptable value: 1 to 15
1124 Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(B5) tration amount becomes. The smaller the
(Media 1) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.
Default value: 3
Acceptable value: 1 to 15
1125 Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(A5/ST) tration amount becomes. The smaller the
(Media 1) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.
Default value: 3
Acceptable value: 1 to 15

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-9
Test
Category Name Contents
number
1126 Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(LT) tration amount becomes. The smaller the
(Media 1) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.
Default value: 3
Acceptable value: 1 to 15
1133 Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(A4) tration amount becomes. The smaller the
(Media 2) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.
Default value: 3
Acceptable value: 1 to 15
1134 Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(B5) tration amount becomes. The smaller the
(Media 2) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.
Default value: 3
Acceptable value: 1 to 15
1135 Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(A5/ST) tration amount becomes. The smaller the
(Media 2) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.
Default value: 3
Acceptable value: 1 to 15

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 10
Test
Category Name Contents
number
1136 Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(LT) tration amount becomes. The smaller the
(Media 2) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.
Default value: 3
Acceptable value: 1 to 15 5
1143 Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(A4) tration amount becomes. The smaller the
(Media 3) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.
Default value: 3
Acceptable value: 1 to 15
1144 Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(B5) tration amount becomes. The smaller the
(Media 3) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.
Default value: 3
Acceptable value: 1 to 15
1145 Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(A5/ST) tration amount becomes. The smaller the
(Media 3) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.
Default value: 3
Acceptable value: 1 to 15

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 11
Test
Category Name Contents
number
1146 Registration amount The larger the value is, the larger the regis-
(LT) tration amount becomes. The smaller the
(Media 3) value is, the smaller the registration amount
becomes. When the registration amount is
too large, paper may be folded or a folding
noise may be heard when the paper is fed.
When the registration amount is too small,
paper may be skewed or a paper jam (E110
or E111) may occur. Therefore, adjust the
values one by one while carefully checking
the status of the fed paper.

Default value: 3
Acceptable value: 1 to 15
2100 Scanning Reproduction ratio in the secondary The larger the value is, the larger the
scanning direction scanned image becomes in the secondary
(100 dpi) scanning direction. The smaller the value is,
the smaller the scanned image becomes in
the secondary scanning direction. When the
value increases by "1", the scanned image
becomes large in increments of approx.
0.3 %.
*1
Default value: 11
Acceptable value: 1 to 21

(A) ABC... (B) ABC...

Fig. 5-1
2101 Reproduction ratio in the secondary The larger the value is, the larger the
scanning direction scanned image becomes in the secondary
(200 dpi) scanning direction. The smaller the value is,
the smaller the scanned image becomes in
the secondary scanning direction. When the
value increases by "1", the scanned image
becomes large in increments of approx.
0.3 %.
*1
Default value: 11
Acceptable value: 1 to 21

(A) ABC... (B) ABC...

Fig. 5-2

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 12
Test
Category Name Contents
number
2102 Scanning Reproduction ratio in the secondary The larger the value is, the larger the
scanning direction scanned image becomes in the secondary
(300 dpi) scanning direction. The smaller the value is,
the smaller the scanned image becomes in
the secondary scanning direction. When the
value increases by "1", the scanned image
becomes large in increments of approx.
0.3 %.
*1
Default value: 11
Acceptable value: 1 to 21

(A) ABC... (B) ABC... 5

Fig. 5-3
2110 Scanning position The larger the value is, the farther the
(Front side / secondary scanning scanned image is moved toward the paper
direction) feeding direction. The smaller the value is,
the farther the scanned image is moved
away from the paper feeding direction.
When the value increases by "1", the
image is moved by approx. 0.0846 mm
(0.0033 inches).
*1
Default value: 36
Acceptable value: 1 to 71

(A) ABC...
(B) ABC...

Fig. 5-4

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 13
Test
Category Name Contents
number
2111 Scanning Scanning position The larger the value is, the farther the
(Back side / secondary scanning scanned image is moved toward the paper
direction) feeding direction. The smaller the value is,
the farther the scanned image is moved
away from the paper feeding direction.
When the value increases by "1", the
image is moved by approx. 0.0846 mm
(0.0033 inches).
*1
Default value: 36
Acceptable value: 1 to 71

(A) ABC...
(B) ABC...

Fig. 5-5
2112 Scanning position The larger the value is, the farther the
(Front side / primary scanning direc- scanned image is moved to the front (to the
tion) left of the paper feeding direction). The
smaller the value is, the farther the scanned
image is moved to the back (to the right of
the paper feeding direction). When the value
increases by "1", the image is moved
approx. by 0.0846 mm (0.0033 inches).
*1
Default value: 59
Acceptable value: 1 to 117

(A) ABC... (B) ABC...

Fig. 5-6

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 14
Test
Category Name Contents
number
2113 Scanning Scanning position The larger the value is, the farther the
(Back side / primary scanning direc- scanned image is moved to the front (to the
tion) left of the paper feeding direction). The
smaller the value is, the farther the scanned
image is moved to the back (to the right of
the paper feeding direction). When the value
increases by "1", the image is moved by
approx. 0.0846 mm (0.0033 inches).
*1
Default value: 59
Acceptable value: 1 to 117

(A) ABC... (B) ABC... 5

Fig. 5-7
2120 Ink printer Setting the ink printer nozzle posi- Sets the print nozzle position of the ink
tion printer. When the value is larger, it is moved
in the outer direction of the paper.
Default value: 3 (3rd nozzle)
Acceptable value: 1 to 6
*1:
Be sure to reboot the equipment when the setting value of 2110 through 2113 is changed.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 15
Test
Category Name Contents
number
5110 Adjustment Upper limit temperature of the heat Default value: 161 (161°C)
value mode roller-1 control (during a job in nor- Acceptable value: 140 to 200 (Unit: °C)
(Heater mal conditions) *2
5111 section) Lower limit temperature of the heat Default value: 160 (160°C)
roller-1 control (during a job in nor- Acceptable value: 140 to 200 (Unit: °C)
mal conditions) *2
5112 Upper limit temperature of the heat Default value: 160 (160°C)
roller-2 control (during a job in nor- Acceptable value: 140 to 200 (Unit: °C)
mal conditions) *2
5113 Lower limit temperature of the heat Default value: 155 (155°C)
roller-2 control (during a job in nor- Acceptable value: 140 to 200 (Unit: °C)
mal conditions) *2
5115 Lower limit temperature of the heat Default value: 157 (157°C)
roller-1 control (during ready) Acceptable value: 140 to 200 (Unit: °C)
*2
5117 Lower limit temperature of the heat Default value: 145 (145°C)
roller-2 control Acceptable value: 140 to 200 (Unit: °C)
(during ready) *2
5120 Upper limit temperature of the heat Default value: 156 (156°C)
roller-1 control (during a job in the Acceptable value: 140 to 200 (Unit: °C)
low-speed mode) *2
5121 Lower limit temperature of the heat Default value: 155 (155°C)
roller-1 control Acceptable value: 140 to 200 (Unit: °C)
(during a job in the low-speed *2
mode)
5122 Upper limit temperature of the heat Default value: 150 (150°C)
roller-2 control Acceptable value: 140 to 200 (Unit: °C)
(during a job in the low-speed *2
mode)
5123 Lower limit temperature of the heat Default value: 145 (145°C)
roller-2 control Acceptable value: 140 to 200 (Unit: °C)
(during a job in the low-speed *2
mode)
*2:
Set the upper limit temperature to 1°C or more than the lower one.
Set the lower limit temperature to 1°C or less than the upper one.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 16
Test
Category Name Contents
number
5400 Adjustment Erasing start temperature of the Default value: 155 (155°C)
value mode heat roller-1 Acceptable value: 140 to 190 (Unit: °C)
5401 (Heater Erasing start temperature of the Default value: 155 (155°C)
section) heat roller-2 Acceptable value: 140 to 190 (Unit: °C)
5610 Ending time of the temperature cor- Sets the time for the correction control to
rection control avoid the lowering of the temperature of the
heat roller due to paper feeding and the
environment.
Default value: 60 (60 sec.)
Acceptable value: 0 to 120 (Unit: sec.)
5700 Pre-running operation start period Sets the time to start (or the intervals of) pre- 5
(during ready) running operations during the ready period.
0: None
1: 0.5H
2: 1.0H (initial value)
3: 1.5H
4: 2.0H
5: 2.5H
6: 3.0H
7: 4.0H
8: 5.0H
9: 6.0H
10: 12.0H
5702 Pre-running operation time when Default value: 20 (20 sec.)
starting (during normal tempera- Acceptable value: 5 to 120 (Unit: sec.)
tures)
5703 Pre-running operation time when Default value: 25 (25 sec.)
starting (during low temperatures) Acceptable value: 5 to 120 (Unit: sec.)
5712 Operation stopping period when the Default value: 30 (30 sec.)
temperature of the edge of the heat Acceptable value: 5 to 120 (Unit: sec.)
roller-1 or -2 is high
5731 Low speed transport control func- Default value: 1 (ON)
tion for small-sized paper (B5, A5-R 0: OFF
and STR) 1: ON

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 17
Test
Category Name Contents
number
6573 Paper sorting Threshold value of the printing ratio When a larger value is set, the printing ratio
near the corner of the paper of an original is judged "high" and it
becomes hard to be rejected.
When the value increases by "1", the rejec-
tion judgment threshold value near the cor-
ner of the paper becomes larger by approx.
1mm2.
*3
Default value: 50
Acceptable value: 0 to 100
6574 Threshold value of the printing ratio When a larger value is set, the printing ratio
at the paper end of an original is judged "high" and it
becomes hard to be rejected.
When the value increases by "1", the rejec-
tion judgment threshold value at the paper
end becomes larger as below.
A4 (Long edge) : 35.1mm2
A4 (Short edge) : 24.7mm2
B5 (Long edge) : 30.3mm2
B5 (Short edge) : 21.3mm2
A5 (Long edge) : 24.7mm2
A5 (Short edge) : 71.2mm2
LT (Long edge) : 33.0mm2
LT (Short edge) : 25.4mm2
ST (Long edge) : 25.4mm2
ST (Short edge) : 16.2mm2
*3
Default value: 38
Acceptable value: 0 to 100
6575 Threshold value of the printing ratio When a larger value is set, the printing ratio
on the paper of an original is judged "high" and it
becomes hard to be rejected.
When the value increases by "1", the rejec-
tion judgment threshold value becomes
larger by approx. 1 % of the one counted by
the pixel counter.
*3
Default value: 20
Acceptable value: 0 to 100
*3:
- Be sure to reboot the equipment when the setting value is changed. (Once the equipment is
rebooted, a new adjustment value is reflected.)
- The frequency of paper jams may be increased if an original whose printing ratio is "high" is not
rejected. Therefore, be sure to gain your customers' approval before the adjustment.
- If the value is set in "100", the rejection judgment will not be performed.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 18
5.4 Setting
This sets various items.

Test
Category Name Contents
number
3500 Card reader Card reading device To enable the e-Bridge ID Gate, a card read-
ing device should be set in the order of
"00YYZZZZ". (Enter the corresponding val-
ues to "YY" and "ZZZZ".)
- YY: Authentication
00: No authentication using card
06: KB Emulation I/F Reader
- ZZZZ: Sub-code (Specifies the usage type
of card ID) 5
0000: No authentication using card
0001: IDm (Felica/NFC-Felica) and (or) UID
(Mifare/NFC-Mifare)
0002: Data (Felica/NFC-Felica/Mifare/NFC-
Mifare)
0003: SSFC mode
Acceptable value: 0-4294967295
3501 Card reader format information -1 To access the data in the noncontact IC
card, the Key Information "LLLL" and the
Sector Number "MMMM" should be set.
The "LLLL" should be set first, and then
"MMMM".
Acceptable value: 0-4294967295
3502 Card reader format information -2 The data of the block number in the noncon-
tact IC is set.
<PPQRSSTU (hexadecimal number)>
PP: 1st block
Q: 1st block beginning byte
R: 1st block ending byte
SS: 2nd block
T: 2nd block beginning byte
U: 2nd block ending byte

<RRBSEbse (hexadecimal number)>


RR: 00 (Fixed)
B: 1st area block number
S: 1st area beginning byte offset
E: 1st area ending byte offset
b: 2nd area block number
s: 2nd area beginning byte offset
e: 2nd area ending byte offset
* If the 2nd block/area is not used, set the
SSTU to "FFFF" (hexadecimal number), the
bse to "FFF"
(hexadecimal number).
Acceptable value: 0-4294967295
3503 Card reader format information -3 The security key "KKKKKKKKKKKK" (12
digits)
<hexadecimal number> in the [Key Informa-
tion] of the [Sector Number] set in the code
08-3501 should be entered.
<Acceptable value>
0-0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
3504 Card authentication LDAP server LDAP server number for the card authenti-
cation when a noncontact IC card is used
should be set.
Default value: 1
Acceptable value: 1 to 100

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 19
Test
Category Name Contents
number
3724 Network NTLMv2 Authentication for Samba Default value: 1
Client 0: OFF
1: ON
3807 Authentication Logging in with a Guest account Default value: 0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
6000 Counter Number of all pages Displays the number of all output pages.
6001 Number of pages with erased Displays the number of pages with erased
images images.
6002 Number of scanned pages (front Displays the number of scanned pages
side) (front side).
6003 Number of scanned pages (back Displays the number of scanned pages
side) (back side).
6262 Image Switching the paper type for scan- Displays the plain/colored paper selection
Processing ning on colored paper menu on the template on TopAccess.
Default value: 0
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
6360 Number of Validating the functions Default value: 0
erasures 1: OFF
0: ON
6370 Switching of the normal/reuse Counts the erasable number of toner colors
mode on the paper.
Default value: 0
1: OFF
0: ON
6380 Erasable number Determine reuse/reject by the erasable
number of toner colors on the paper.
Default value: 6 (times)
Acceptable value: 3 to 10
7100 Maintenance Erase unit Displays the number of pages with erased
images.
7101 Erase unit replacement Clears the number of pages with erased
images.
7102 Starting of the shading sheet main- Moves the shading sheet to the mainte-
tenance nance position. (Be sure to close all covers
in advance.)
7103 Ending of the shading sheet main- Moves the shading sheet to the home posi-
tenance tion. (Be sure to close all covers in
advance.)
7110 Ink printer back-up injection (after Performs a back-up injection of the ink
cleaning) printer such as after cleaning its print head.
7111 Ink printer back-up injection (after Performs a back-up injection of the ink
replacing the cartridge) printer after replacing the cartridge.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 20
Test
Category Name Contents
number
7120 Maintenance Erase unit error count clear Clears the count of errors which occurred
due to an abnormal temperature in the
erase unit.(C410, C420, C421, C422, C423)
Clears the count of errors which occurred
due to an abnormal temperature in the
erase unit.
Sub code: Detects the following;
1: 40°C check error at starting time (1st
time)
2: 40°C check error at starting time (2nd
time)
5: Timeout for the warming up completion
7: Lower limit temperature with the center 5
thermistor after the warming up completion
8: Timeout at the normal temperature recov-
ering time
9: Upper limit temperature with the center
thermistor
17: Lower limit temperature with the side
thermistor after the warming up completion
19: Upper limit temperature with the side
thermistor
20: Unconnected thermistor during the
ready status
21: Unconnected thermistor during the oper-
ation
8532 Control panel brightness level Default value: 4
adjustment Brightness level: 1 to 7
8719 Network MTU setting of network Default value: 1500
communication Acceptable value: 576 to 1500
8758 Overwriting of login at card authen- Switches the enable/disable setting for the
tication function to overwrite the login information at
the card authentication.
Default value: 0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
8804 Setting of IP filtering Default value: 0
1: Enabled
0: Disabled
8805 Setting of MAC address Default value: 0
filtering 1: Enabled
0: Disabled
8930 Maintenance Factory default Returns the items changed by users to an
initial value for each destination.
8941 System Acquiring debug logs Sets ON/OFF for the function of debug logs
acquisition by pressing the [MENU],
[DOWN] and [OK] buttons simultaneously.
Default value: 1
0: OFF
1: ON
8947 Card reader Automatic user registration for card Default value: 0
authentication 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
9010 Energy Setting of energy saving mode Default value: 1 (1 min.)
saving mode Acceptable value: 0 to 60
1: Enabled
0: Disabled (Unit: minute)

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 21
Test
Category Name Contents
number
9083 Maintenance Initialization of NIC
information
9111 Setting the auto clear time Sets the auto clear time.
Default value: 45 (seconds)
Acceptable value: 0: None, 15, 30, 45, 60,
75, 90, 105, 120, 135, 150 (seconds)
9280 Setting of error sound Default value: 1
0: OFF
1: ON
9281 Sound setting of entering energy Default value: 0
saving mode 0: OFF
1: ON
9282 Setting of the automatic recovery Default value: 0
after releasing a paper jam 0: OFF
1: ON
9283 Paper Display setting of the paper type Displays the paper type selection menu on
selection selection menu on TopAccess TopAccess.
Default value: 0
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
9292 Authentication User authentication setting Default value: 0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
9293 User authentication method Default value: 0
0: Local authentication
1: Windows domain authentication
2: LDAP authentication
9406 Network Method for acquiring IP address Default value: 2
1: Static IP address
2: Dynamic IP address (DHCP)
3: Dynamic IP address (DHCP)
without Auto IP
9407 Subnet mask 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
9408 IP address 0.0.0.0 to 126.255.255.255, 128.0.0.0 to
255.255.255.255
9410 Default gateway 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255
9430 Maintenance Availability of the HTTP server Default value: 1
0: OFF
1: ON
9548 HTTP server (SSL) OFF/ON Default value: 0
0: OFF
1: ON
9900 ROM MAIN ROM version Displays the MAIN ROM version.
9901 version MAIN ROM boot version Displays the version of the MAIN ROM boot
section.
9902 SCAN ROM version Displays the SCAN ROM version.
9903 System OS version Displays the system OS version.
9904 System ROM version Displays the system ROM version.
9905 System BIOS version Displays the system BIOS version.
9906 Control panel ROM version Displays the control panel ROM version.
9907 Maintenance MAC address display Displays the MAC address.
9908 Memory capacity display Displays the memory capacity.
9909 Serial number display Displays the serial number.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 22
5.5 Log output / adjustment value saving mode
This mode outputs various logs and saves adjustment values.

Test
Category Name Contents
number
1950 Log output System setting values in a CSV file Outputs the setting values saved in the SYS
board to a USB device as a CSV file. Be
sure to connect a USB device to the equip-
ment before performing the test.
File name: SysSettingsYYYYMMDDH-
HmmSS.csv
1951 Error history list Saves the data with the CSV file in a USB
device. Be sure to connect a USB device to
the equipment before performing the test.
5
File name: ErrorHistoryMMDDHHmmSS.csv
1952 Power ON/OFF log Saves the data with the CSV file in a USB
device. Be sure to connect a USB device to
the equipment before performing the test.
File name: PowerOutputMMDDH-
HmmSS.csv
1953 Job list Saves the data with the CSV file in a USB
device. Be sure to connect a USB device to
the equipment before performing the test.
File name: JobOutputMMDDHHmmSS.csv
1954 Adjustment list Saves the data with the CSV file in a USB
device. Be sure to connect a USB device to
the equipment before performing the test.
File name: AdjustmentListOutputMMDDH-
HmmSS.csv
1955 Saving of the Saving of the adjustment value list Saves the adjustment value data in a USB
adjustment (for replacing the main board) device. Be sure to connect a USB device to
value the equipment before performing the test.
File name: AdjustmentValueList.bin
1956 Writing of the adjustment value list Saves the adjustment value data in a USB
(for replacing the main board) device. Be sure to connect a USB device to
the equipment before performing the test.
1957 Backing up the adjustment value Backs up the adjustment value data of the
(for replacing the main board) main board into the SSD.
1958 Writing of the adjustment value Writes the adjustment value data backed up
(for replacing the main board) in the SSD into the main board.
* MMDDHHmmSS of the file name means the time when the equipment output log. (MM: month, DD:
day, HH: hour, mm: minute, SS: second)

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 23
e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 24
6. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

6.1 Overview

6.1.1 General Description


The purpose of preventive maintenance (PM) is to maintain the quality level of this equipment by peri-
odically inspecting and cleaning this equipment and also replacing the parts whose replacement timing
has come according to the maintenance contract.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
6-1
6.2 Preventive Maintenance Checklist

Lubrication / Replacement Operation


Item Cleaning P-I
Coating (x 1,000 sheets) check
Erase unit - - 270 - 50-1

Notes:
• Perform replacing in the above timing.
• The value in the “Replacement” field of the table above indicates the replacement number of
scan pages or erase pages.
• Be careful not to put oil on the rollers, belts and belt pulleys when lubricating.

Symbols/value used in the checklist


Cleaning Lubrication / Coating Replacement Operation check
A: Clean with alcohol L: Launa 40 Value: Replacement cycle O: After cleaning or
B: Clean with soft pad, SI: Silicon oil R: Replace if deformed or replacement, confirm
cloth or vacuum cleaner W1: White grease damaged there is no problem.
(Molykote EM-30L)
W2: White grease
(Molykote HP-300)
AV: Alvania No.2
FL: Floil (GE-334C)

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
6-2
6.3 Storage of Supplies and Replacement Parts
Precautions for storing supplies and replacement parts are shown below.

1. Erase unit
Erase unit should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10oC to 35oC (no
condensation), and should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
6-3
e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
6-4
7. ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING

7.1 General Description


This chapter explains the procedures for solving various kinds of trouble that might occur in the equip-
ment.
When some trouble occurs, first check if an error code is displayed on the LCD screen of the control
panel.
If one is displayed, refer to “6.2 Error Code List” to figure out the classification and contents of the error,
and then refer to “6.3 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code” to remove its cause.

The cause of any trouble in this equipment may just be a minor failure. Check the items below.

1. Is there any problem with the power cable or an outlet?


* Check if the power cable is inserted securely. If it is almost out or not inserted securely, the power
voltage may become unstable, causing a problem in the equipment.
2. Are the connectors connected securely?
* Reconnect them securely. Even if they are apparently inserted, there may be a contact failure. 7
Carefully check if the connection is secured especially after the disassembly or replacement of
parts.
Note:
If an unusual odor is detected or if smoke or fire comes out of the equipment, immediately turn
the power OFF.
Even in cases other than the above, fully observe the safety precautions.
If any PC board shall be replaced, refer to  P.8-1 "8. REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/SSD".

7.1.1 If a problem continues even after performing all troubleshooting


If a problem persists even after carrying out all troubleshooting and technical tips, report the problem to
the appropriate Toshiba service center along with the following information. This information will help
the service center understand your problem and take quick action to find the solution.

1. Serial number
2. For abnormal acoustic noise, describe the situation in as much detail as possible.
3. For hardware-related problems, provide photos of any broken parts, paper jams, etc. In case of
paper jams, include the type of paper and its manufacturer.
4. For software-related problems, provide TopAccess Logs and the detailed procedure needed to
duplicate the problem.
* This is the minimum information required to report to respond to a complaint. It would be appreci-
ated if you could obtain additional information.
* Follow the directions of the service center if additional information is requested, as each issue is
unique to some degree.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7-1
7.1.2 Collection of debug logs with a USB device

[A] General description


This section shows the procedure to collect the debug log information of the equipment with USB
device. The purpose of collect the debug log is that to collect the information for analyzing some issue,
which is needed to investigate, when the equipment is working. If the some issues happen, you can col-
lect the debug log by inserting the USB device and following the procedure written in this section.

The following information is included in the debug logs since it may be difficult to investigate only
using the debug log.
Internal operation, Job history, SSD/memory usage status, etc. (Personal/Corporate information
(address book) not included)

[B] Attention
Do not open this procedure to public because of security protection, and only service engineer can col-
lect the debug log.

[C] About USB device


USB device needs to FAT32 format before using. (Recommend size is more than 1GB).

[D] Procedure for collection debug log

(1) Check that the self-diagnostic code 8941 (Acquiring debug logs) is set to "1: ON".
(2) Insert the USB device to the equipment while power is ON.
(3) Press the [MENU], [DOWN] and [OK] buttons simultaneously after insert the USB device. "In
progress" will be displayed.
(4) When to collect the debug log is finished, the status screen will be displayed.
(5) Enter the self-diagnosis mode and enter the test number 1951, 1952, 1953 and 1954 sequen-
tially. When to collect the each log is finished, "initialized" will be displayed.
(6) After return to the status screen, remove the USB device.
Notes:
• In the case of the USB device inserted when the Paper Reusable Device is not ready, the col-
lection of the debug log will not start.
• Don’t remove the USB device while "In progress" is displayed.
• If "Insert USB" is displayed when executing (3), USB memory cannot be recognized, yet.
Retry procedure from (3).
• If "Failed" is displayed when executing (4), USB device cannot be recognized, yet. Retry pro-
cedure from (4).

[E] Collected debug log

(1) If completed the collection of the debug log, there is encrypted file in the USB device.
Folder name: KH-1020(*)
File name: XXXXXXXXX.YYYYMMDDHHmmSS.enc (XXXX= Serial number of Paper Reusable
Device, YYYY= year, MM= month, DD= day, HH= hour, mm= minute, SS= second)
And there are following CSV files in the USB device, too.
Folder name: KH-1020\MainBackup (*)
Files name: ErrorHistory.csv, PowerOutput.csv, JobOutput.csv, AdjustmentListOutput.csv
(*) If there is not the folder, the equipment create the folder automatically.
(2) After the debug logs have been collected, be sure to send them to the service center together
with a report.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7-2
[F] Other informations
When the debug logs are collected, also do so for the following information.

(1) Problem occurrence time.


(2) Status of when you collected the debug log.
Examples:
- You checked the problem and connected a USB device to the equipment.
- No problem occurred when an attempt to collect the debug log was made; however it has not
been a long time since the problem occurred or the customer has not used the equipment, so the
log can be collected.
(3) After the problem occurs, check if you turn the power OFF/ON until the debug log is collected.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7-3
7.2 Error Code List
When an error occurs, the corresponding error code and its contents are displayed on the LCD screen.

7.2.1 Alert

Classifica- Troubleshoot-
Error code Contents
tion ing

A100 Paper feed- Paper misfeeding: P.7-14


ing Paper does not reach the feed sensor after the specified time has
passed during the pick-up transport.

A101 Detection of stapled sheets: P.7-15


After the paper has passed through the feed sensor, the front and
rear paper pull-up sensors are turned ON for a longer period than
that specified time, before the fixed time for reaching them is
over.

A102 Paper leading edge skew: P.7-15


The rear skew sensor is not turned ON when the paper leading
edge has been transported for a longer period than the time set
with the adjustment value after the front skew sensor has been
turned ON, or the opposite.

A103 Multiple paper feeding alert: P.7-16


Multiple paper feeding is detected after the feed sensor has been
turned ON by the paper leading edge and before the specified
time has passed.

A105 No paper set in the feed tray: P.7-17


Paper is not set in the feed tray.

A200 Transport- Cover opened: P.7-17


ing The cover is opened during idling.

A201 Paper remaining: P.7-18


Paper is detected on the transport path of the erase unit when the
power has been turned ON.

A400 Reuse Reuse drawer full: P.7-19


drawer The reuse drawer is full of paper.
Reject
A401 drawer Reject drawer full: P.7-19
The reject drawer is full of paper.

A402 Reuse drawer absence: P.7-20


The reuse drawer is not installed properly.

A403 Reject drawer absence: P.7-20


The reject drawer is not installed properly.

A404 Paper detection by the reuse drawer: P.7-20


Small paper is placed in the reuse drawer.

A405 Paper check for the reuse drawer: P.7-21


Check if the small paper in the reuse drawer has been removed.

A500 Power sup- 24 V power supply abnormality: P.7-22


ply An abnormality occurs in the 24 V power supply. (The voltage of
the 24 V power supply is lowered even though all covers have
been closed.)

A910 Ink printer Ink printer not installed: P.7-22


When the tests No. 7201 through 7211 have been performed, the
ink printer is not recognized.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7-4
7.2.2 Jam

Classifica- Troubleshoot-
Error code Contents
tion ing

E010 Paper exit Paper remaining in the transport path: P.7-22


jam Paper is detected in the transport path of the erase unit when a
job has started.

E011 Paper jam caused by the wrong paper size: P.7-24


Non-acceptable short-size paper (164 mm or shorter) is detected
in the transport path of the erase unit.

E012 Paper jam due to the cover open: P.7-24


A paper jam occurs when the cover is opened while the paper is
being transported in the transport path of the erase unit.

E110 Paper feed Paper remaining at the feed sensor: P.7-25


jam Paper remains at the feed sensor while it is being transported in
the transport path of the erase unit. (150% of the paper size)

E111 Paper not reaching the registration sensor: P.7-26 7


The registration sensor is not turned ON even though the speci-
fied time has passed after the paper has been aligned and the
feed motor has been restarted.

E112 Paper remaining at the registration sensor: P.7-26


Paper remains at the registration sensor while it is being trans-
ported in the transport path of the erase unit.

E113 Paper pull-up detection jam: P.7-27


Stapled paper is detected since its trailing edge has been pulled
up at the position exceeding the specified value after it has
passed through the feed sensor.

E114 Paper skew jam: P.7-27


The rear skew sensor is not turned OFF when the paper trailing
edge has been transported for a longer period than that specified
time after the front skew sensor has been turned OFF, or the
opposite.

E115 Multiple paper feeding jam: P.7-28


Multiple paper feeding is detected when paper transport takes a
longer time than that specified after the feed sensor has been
turned ON.

E210 Paper trans- Paper remaining at the scanner entrance sensor: P.7-29
port jam Paper remains at the scanner entrance sensor.

E211 Paper not reaching the scanner entrance sensor: P.7-29


The scanner entrance sensor is not turned ON when the paper
has been transported from the registration sensor and the speci-
fied time has passed.

E212 Paper remaining at the scanner exit sensor: P.7-30


Paper remains at the scanner exit sensor.

E213 Paper not reaching the scanner exit sensor: P.7-31


The scanner exit sensor is not turned ON when the paper has
been transported from the scanner entrance sensor and the
specified time has passed.

E310 Paper remaining at the 1st transport sensor: P.7-32


Paper remains at the 1st transport sensor during the paper trans-
port.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7-5
Classifica- Troubleshoot-
Error code Contents
tion ing

E311 Paper trans- Paper not reaching the 1st transport sensor: P.7-32
port jam The 1st transport sensor is not turned ON when the specified
time has passed after the paper has reached the scanner exit
sensor.

E312 Paper remaining at the 2nd transport sensor: P.7-33


Paper remains at the 2nd transport sensor during the paper
transport.

E313 Paper not reaching the 2nd transport sensor: P.7-33


The 2nd transport sensor is not turned ON when the specified
time has passed after the paper has reached the 1st transport
sensor.

E314 Paper remaining at the erase unit entrance sensor: P.7-34


Paper remains at the erase unit entrance sensor during the paper
transport.

E315 Paper not reaching the erase unit entrance sensor: P.7-34
The erase unit entrance sensor is not turned ON when the speci-
fied time has passed after the paper has reached the 2nd trans-
port sensor.

E316 Paper remaining at the erase unit exit sensor: P.7-35


Paper remains at the erase unit exit sensor during the paper
transport.

E317 Paper not reaching the erase unit exit sensor: P.7-35
The erase unit exit sensor is not turned ON when the specified
time has passed after the paper has reached the erase unit
entrance sensor.

E318 Paper remaining at the 3rd transport sensor: P.7-36


Paper remains at the 3rd transport sensor while the paper is
being transported in the paper path of the erase unit.

E319 Paper not reaching the 3rd transport sensor: P.7-37


The 3rd transport sensor is not turned ON when the specified
time has passed after the paper has reached the erase unit exit
sensor.

E320 Paper remaining at the 4th transport sensor: P.7-37


Paper remains at the 4th transport sensor while it is being trans-
ported in the paper path of the erase unit.

E321 Paper not reaching the 4th transport sensor: P.7-38


The 4th transport sensor is not turned ON when the specified
time has passed after the paper has reached the 3rd transport
sensor.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7-6
Classifica- Troubleshoot-
Error code Contents
tion ing

E410 Paper exit Paper remaining at the exit path sensor: P.7-38
jam Paper remains at the exit path sensor during the paper transport.

E411 Paper not reaching the exit path sensor: P.7-39


The reuse drawer entrance sensor is not turned ON when the
specified time has passed after the paper has reached the scan-
ner exit sensor.

E412 Paper remaining at the reuse drawer entrance sensor: P.7-40


Paper remains at the reuse drawer entrance sensor during the
paper transport.

E413 Paper not reaching the reuse drawer entrance sensor: P.7-40
The reuse drawer entrance sensor is not turned ON when the
specified time has passed after the paper has reached the exit
path sensor.

E414 Paper remaining at the 5th transport sensor: P.7-41


Paper remains at the 5th transport sensor during the paper trans-
port. 7
E415 Paper not reaching the 5th transport sensor: P.7-41
The 5th transport sensor is not turned ON when the specified
time has passed after the paper has reached the reuse drawer
entrance sensor.

E416 Paper remaining at the 6th transport sensor: P.7-42


Paper remains at the 6th transport sensor during the paper trans-
port.

E417 Paper not reaching the 6th transport sensor: P.7-43


The 6th transport sensor is not turned ON when the specified
time has passed after the paper has reached the 5th transport
sensor.

E420 Reuse drawer open jam: P.7-43


The reuse drawer sensor is turned OFF during its operation.

E421 Reject drawer open jam: P.7-44


The reject drawer sensor is turned OFF during its operation.
E510 Paper feed Pick-up roller home position sensor abnormality: P.7-44
jam The pick-up roller home position sensor is not switched from ON
to OFF, or from OFF to ON when the pick-up roller movement
motor has been driven and the specified time has passed.

E610 Paper exit Reuse drawer aligning roller position sensor abnormality: P.7-45
jam The reuse drawer aligning roller position sensor is not switched
from ON to OFF, or from OFF to ON when the reuse drawer align-
ing roller lift motor has been driven and the specified time has
passed.

E700 System Paper detection sensor sequence abnormality: P.7-45


error An abnormality is detected in the ON/OFF of the paper detection
sensor during its operation.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7-7
7.2.3 Error

Classifica- Troubleshoot-
Error code Contents
tion ing

C010 Motor Feed motor abnormality: P.7-47


abnormality The feed motor does not rotate normally.

C020 Separation motor abnormality: P.7-47


The separation motor does not rotate normally.

C030 Scan motor abnormality: P.7-47


The scan motor does not rotate normally.

C040 Speed adjustment motor abnormality: P.7-47


The speed adjustment motor does not rotate normally.

C050 Erase unit motor abnormality: P.7-47


The erase unit motor does not rotate normally.

C060 Reuse drawer exit motor abnormality: P.7-47


Abnormal interruption occurs in the reuse drawer exit motor.

C070 Pick-up roller movement motor abnormality: P.7-47


The pick-up roller movement motor does not rotate normally.

C080 Reuse drawer aligning roller lift motor abnormality: P.7-47


Abnormal interruption occurs in the reuse drawer aligning roller
lift motor.

C410 Thermistor Thermistor disconnection: P.7-47


Heat roller The thermistor is not connected properly or open circuited.

C420 Upper limit abnormality in the heat roller-1 temperature: P.7-48


The temperature of the heat roller-1 center thermistor reaches
235°C or the side thermistor reaches 235°C.

C421 Lower limit abnormality in the heat roller-1 temperature: P.7-49


• The temperature does not reach 100°C when the specified
time has passed after the heat roller-1 has been turned ON.
• A 40°C temperature difference is generated between the cen-
ter and side thermistors.
During operating, if the temperature is less than the lower
limit, it does not recover even though the heater has been
turned ON and the specified time has passed.
C422 Upper limit abnormality in the heat roller-2 temperature: P.7-49
The temperature of the heat roller-2 center thermistor reaches
235°C or the side thermistor reaches 235°C.
C423 Lower limit abnormality in the heat roller-2 temperature: P.7-50
• The temperature does not reach 100°C when the specified
time has passed after heat roller-2 has been turned ON.
• A 40°C temperature difference is generated between the cen-
ter and side thermistors.
During operating, if the temperature is less than the lower
limit, it does not recover even though the heater has been
turned ON and the specified time has passed.

C510 Scanner Scanner communication error: P.7-51


A communication error occurs between the main board and the
scanner board.
C511 Scanner connection error: P.7-51
The scanning section is not detected after the power has been
turned ON.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7-8
Classifica- Troubleshoot-
Error code Contents
tion ing

C512 Scanner calibration error: P.7-51


A calibration error in the scanner section occurs.

C514 Scanner board – system control board communication error: P.7-52


A communication error occurs between the scanner board and
the system control board.

C600 System Main board - system control board communication error: P.7-52
control The communication between the main board and the system
board control board is interrupted.

C920 Power sup- 100 V/200 V power supply abnormality: P.7-53


ply During operating, the 100 V/200 V power supply is turned OFF.

C930 Battery Voltage in the battery decreased: P.7-53


The voltage in the backup battery has gone down.

C950 System SYS board cooling fan lock abnormality: P.7-53


control The lock of the motor of the SYS board cooling fan is detected.
board 7
CB10 Main board Main program error: P.7-54
A checksum error occurs in the main program of the main board.

CB11 Boot program error: P.7-54


A checksum error occurs in the boot program of the main board.

CB12 Program overwriting error: P.7-55


A program download overwriting error occurs in the main board.

CB13 RAM abnormality: P.7-55


A RAM overwriting/reading error occurs in the main board.

CB14 SRAM abnormality: P.7-55


A SRAM checksum error occurs.

CB15 Flash ROM overwriting error: P.7-55


An overwriting error to a Flash ROM occurs.

CE00 Communi- USB device abnormality: P.7-55


cation error Reading, writing, deleting or log overwriting into a USB device is
not performed normally.

CE10 Communication error between the main board and the scanner P.7-56
board:
The data communication between the main board and the scan-
ner board does not respond, or the received data differ from
those sent.

CE20 Ink printer connection error: P.7-56


The ink printer is not detected after the power has been turned
ON.

F010 System System error P.7-57


error The system does not start after the power has been turned ON.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7-9
7.2.4 File sharing related error

Classifica- Troubleshoot-
Error code Contents
tion ing

2D11 Storage Storing documents in a shared folder or a USB device failed. P.7-58

2D30 Storing documents in a shared folder or a USB device failed. P.7-58

2D31 Storing documents in a USB device failed. P.7-58

2D34 File sharing Directory creation failed during management scanning. P.7-59
related error
2D35 File creation or logging on failed during management scanning. P.7-59

2D36 Copy file creation failed during management scanning. P.7-59

2D37 Network connection failed during management scanning. P.7-59

2D38 Memory became full during management scanning. P.7-60

2D60 Network Storing documents in a shared folder or a USB device failed. P.7-60

2D62 Connecting to a destination network failed. P.7-60

2DC0 Job cancelled -

7.2.5 System error

Troubleshoot-
Error code Contents
ing

10001 Software internal error P.7-63


10002
10003
10008
10100
20004
20005
30002

10005 Scanner internal error P.7-63

10006 Paper detection time-out error P.7-63

10007 Paper transport time-out error P.7-63

10009 Shading error P.7-65

10010 Heat roller ON signal error P.7-65

20003 No paper error P.7-66

20006 Software internal error (Memory is full) P.7-67

20007 Paper amount excess error P.7-67

30001 Power failure error P.7-67

30021 Software internal error P.7-68


30022
30023
30024
30025
30026

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 10
Troubleshoot-
Error code Contents
ing

7118 Firmware renewal notice (It is published when firmware is -


updated.)

7183 Network setting renewal notice (It is published when a network -


setup is changed.)

F120 Database abnormality P.7-68

F121 User management database abnormality P.7-68

F122 Log management database abnormality P.7-68

F600 Firmware update error P.7-68

F902 System firmware / system software model information error P.7-69

7.2.6 Access related error


7
Classifica- Troubleshoot-
Error code Contents
tion ing

6007 Setting error Unsuccessful user login to equipment P.7-70

6042 Setting error Card authentication fails due to a setting error. P.7-70

6100 Setting error User account is locked -

6131 Setting error MFP fail to verify clock with time server P.7-70

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 11
7.2.7 Maintenance error

Classifica- Troubleshoot-
Error code Contents
tion ing

7101 System System firmware updating failed. P.7-70


update
7103 Engine firmware updating failed. P.7-70

7105 Scanner firmware updating failed. P.7-70

710F Installation of language pack failed. P.7-70

7111 Installation of patch failed. P.7-70

7123 Unsuccessful Import of template data P.7-71

7129 Unsuccessful Import of user Information P.7-71

712D Unsuccessful import of department data P.7-71

7132 Failed to import any users P.7-71

7134 Failed to import any department code P.7-71

7143 Unsuccessful export of template data P.7-71

7149 Unsuccessful export of user Information P.7-71

714B Unsuccessful export of role information P.7-71

714D Unsuccessful export of department information P.7-71

7151 Unsuccessful export of log data P.7-72

716B Reset of the section counter went wrong P.7-72

7188 Unsuccessful user password modification P.7-72

7191 DDNS public key file upload failed P.7-72

7193 DDNS private key file upload failure P.7-72

71A1 Client certificate Issued -

71D0 Factory default failure P.7-73

71F1 Unsuccessful creation of clone file P.7-73

71F3 Unsuccessful Import of clone data P.7-73

71F4 Failed to decrypt clone file P.7-73

71F5 Failed to encrypt clone file P.7-73

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 12
7.2.8 Network error

Classifica- Troubleshoot-
Error code Contents
tion ing

8000 Network Static IPv4 address conflict P.7-74


error
8011 Link local Address Conflict P.7-74

8012 Manual Address Conflict P.7-74

8013 Stateless Address Conflict P.7-74

8014 Stateful Address Conflict P.7-75

8061 Secure primary DDNS update error P.7-75

8062 Network Secure update to secondary IPv4 server failed P.7-75


error

8063 Network Secure update to primary IPv6 server failed P.7-75


error
7
8064 Network Secure update to secondary IPv6 server failed P.7-75
error

8065 Network IPv6 primary DDNS update error P.7-75


error

8066 Network IPv6 secondary DDNS update error P.7-75


error

8067 Network IPv4 primary DDNS update error P.7-75


error

8068 Network IPv4 secondary DDNS update error P.7-75


error

8069 Network IPv4 secondary DDNS update error P.7-75


error

812C Network Secure update date/time is not correct P.7-75


error

812D Network LDAP date/time is not correct P.7-75


error

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 13
7.3 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code

7.3.1 Check item

Check item Contents

Sensor check • Check the sensor in the test mode.


• Check that there is no dust on the sensor.
• Check that the actuator is correctly operated.

Connector check • Check that the connector is not disconnected.


• Check that the pins are not deformed and do not come off.
• Disconnect and reconnect the connector.

Harness check Check if the harnesses are open circuited.

Motor check • Check the motor in the test mode.


• Check that there is no abnormality in the driving section.
• Check that there is no abnormality in the roller.

Board check Check if the board is short circuited or open circuited.

7.3.2 Alert
[A100] Paper misfeeding

Classification Error content

Paper misfeeding Paper does not reach the feed sensor after the specified time has passed
during the pick-up transport.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there are abnormal curls or folds on the paper.

Pick-up roller Clean the roller if it is dirty. Replace the roller if it is worn out.

Feed roller Clean the roller if it is dirty. Replace the roller if it is worn out.

Feed sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Feed motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the feed sensor and the main board is
disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the feed motor and the main board is dis-
connected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Pick-up roller

Feed roller

Feed sensor

Feed motor

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 14
Parts to be replaced Remark

Main board

[A101] Detection of stapled sheets

Classification Error content

Detection of stapled sheets After the paper has passed through the feed sensor, before the fixed time
has elapsed, the front and rear paper pull-up sensors are turned ON for
longer than the specified time.

Check item Measures

Paper • Check if there are abnormal curls or folds on the paper.


• Check if the paper is placed properly or if it exceeds the maximum
weight allowed.

Multi feed paper sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly. 7
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Harness Check if the harness between the multi feed paper sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Multi feed paper sensor

Main board

[A102] Paper leading edge skew

Classification Error content

Paper leading edge skew The rear skew sensor is not turned ON when the paper leading edge has
been transported for longer than the time set with the adjustment value
after the front skew sensor has been turned ON, or the opposite.

Check item Measures

Paper • Check if there are abnormal curls or folds on the paper.


• Check if the paper is placed properly.

Pick-up roller Clean the roller if it is dirty. Replace the roller if it is worn out.

Feed roller Clean the roller if it is dirty. Replace the roller if it is worn out.

Separation roller Clean the roller if it is dirty. Replace the roller if it is worn out.

Front skew sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 15
Check item Measures

Rear skew sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the front skew sensor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the rear skew sensor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Pick-up roller

Feed roller

Separation roller

Front skew sensor

Rear skew sensor

Main board

[A103] Multiple paper feeding alert

Classification Error content

Multiple paper feeding alert Multiple paper feeding is detected after the feed sensor has been turned
ON by the paper leading edge and before the specified time has passed.

Check item Measures

Paper • Check if there are abnormal curls or folds on the paper.


• Check if the paper is stapled.
• Check if the type or size of the paper is outside of the specifications.

Separation roller Clean the roller if it is dirty. Replace the roller if it is worn out.

Multi feed paper sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harness Check if the harness between the multi feed paper sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Separation roller

Multi feed paper sensor

Main board

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 16
[A105] No paper set in the feed tray

Classification Error content

No paper set in the feed tray Paper is not set in the feed tray.

Check item Measures

Feed tray paper sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harness Check if the harness between the feed tray paper sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Feed tray paper sensor

Main board 7

[A200] Cover opened

Classification Error content

Cover opened The cover is opened during idling.

Check item Measures

Covers Check if there is any dirt, deformation or damage on the covers.

Feed cover switch • Check if the switch is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Left upper cover switch • Check if the switch is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Left center cover switch • Check if the switch is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Right lower cover switch • Check if the switch is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Right upper cover switch • Check if the switch is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Left lower cover switch • Check if the switch is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses Check if the harnesses between each switch and the main board are dis-
connected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Covers

Feed cover switch

Left upper cover switch

Left center cover switch

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 17
Parts to be replaced Remark

Right lower cover switch

Right upper cover switch

Left lower cover switch

Main board

[A201] Paper remaining

Classification Error content

Paper remaining Paper is detected on the transport path of the erase unit when the power
has been turned ON.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Exit path sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

1st transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

2nd transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Erase unit entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Erase unit exit sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

3rd transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

4th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

5th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

6th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Reuse drawer entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses Check if the harnesses between each transport sensor and the main board
are disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Exit path sensor

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 18
Parts to be replaced Remark
1st transport sensor

2nd transport sensor

Erase unit entrance sensor

Erase unit exit sensor

3rd transport sensor

4th transport sensor

5th transport sensor

6th transport sensor

Reuse drawer entrance sensor

Main board

[A400] Reuse drawer full 7

Classification Error content

Reuse drawer full The reuse drawer is full of paper.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Reuse drawer paper full sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.
• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harness Check if the harness between the reuse drawer paper full sensor and the
main board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Reuse drawer paper full sensor

Main board

[A401] Reject drawer full

Classification Error content

Reject drawer full The reject drawer is full of paper.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Reject drawer paper full sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.
• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harness Check if the harness between the reject drawer paper full sensor and the
main board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 19
Parts to be replaced Remark

Reject drawer paper full sensor

Main board

[A402] Reuse drawer absence

Classification Error content

Reuse drawer absence The reuse drawer is not installed properly.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Reuse drawer sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harness Check if the harness between the reuse drawer sensor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Reuse drawer sensor

Main board

[A403] Reject drawer absence

Classification Error content

Reject drawer absence The reject drawer is not installed properly.

Check item Measures


Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Reject drawer sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harness Check if the harness between the reject drawer sensor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Reject drawer sensor

Main board

[A404] Reuse drawer full

Classification Error content

Reuse drawer full A5 or ST-R paper is placed in the reuse drawer.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 20
Check item Measures

Reuse drawer Remove A5 or ST-R paper in the reuse drawer.

Scanner exit sensor (S11) • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

System control board Check if the system control board is damaged.

Harness • Check if the harness between the scanner exit sensor (S11) and the
main board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness or the connector between the main board and sys-
tem control board is disconnected or open circuited.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Scanner exit sensor (S11)

Main board

System control board


7
Harnesses

[A405] Confirmation of A404 alert release completion

Classification Error content

Alert release completion After the occurrence of A404, paper has been removed from the reuse
drawer but the alert release confirmation is not completed ([OK] is not
pressed).

Check item Measures

Reuse drawer [OK] is not pressed after paper has been removed from the reuse drawer.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.


System control board Check if the system control board is damaged.

Control panel board Check if the control panel board is damaged.

Harness • Check if the harness or the connector between the main board and sys-
tem control board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness or the connector between the control panel board
and system control board is disconnected or open circuited.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Main board

System control board

Control panel board

Harnesses

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 21
[A500] 24 V power supply abnormality

Classification Error content

Power supply abnormality The voltage of the 24 V power supply is lowered even though all covers
have been closed.

Check item Measures

Power supply board • Power supply board check


• 24 V output check (CN510)

Parts to be replaced Remark

Power supply board

[A910] Ink printer not installed

Classification Error content

Ink printer not installed When the tests No. 7201 through 7211 have been performed, the ink printer
is not recognized.

Check item Measures


Ink printer board Check if the ink printer board is damaged.

Ink cartridge • Check that there is no abnormality in the connecting terminal.


• Check that the terminal is connected properly by removing and inserting
the ink cartridge.

Ink carriage assembly Check that there is no abnormality in the connecting terminal.

Cable • Check if the cable between the ink carriage assembly and the ink printer
board is open circuited.
• Check that the connector is connected properly.

Parts to be replaced Remark


Ink printer board

Ink cartridge

Ink carriage assembly

Cable

7.3.3 Jam
[E010] Paper remaining in the transport path

Classification Error content

Paper remaining in the transport Paper is detected on the paper transport path of the erase unit when a job
path has started.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 22
Check item Measures

Exit path sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

1st transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

2nd transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Erase unit entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.
Erase unit exit sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.
• Check if the connector is connected properly.

3rd transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly. 7
4th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.
• Check if the connector is connected properly.

5th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

6th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Reuse drawer entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses Check if the harnesses between each transport sensor and the main board
are disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Exit path sensor

1st transport sensor

2nd transport sensor

Erase unit entrance sensor

Erase unit exit sensor

3rd transport sensor

4th transport sensor

5th transport sensor

6th transport sensor

Reuse drawer entrance sensor

Main board

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 23
[E011] Paper jam caused by the wrong paper size

Classification Error content

Paper jam caused by the wrong Non-acceptable short-size paper (164 mm or shorter) is detected in the
paper size transport path of the erase unit.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if the type or size of the paper is outside of the specifications.

Feed sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Harness Check if the harness between the feed sensor and the main board is dis-
connected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Feed sensor

Main board

[E012] Paper jam due to the cover open

Classification Error content

Paper jam due to the cover open A paper jam occurs when the cover is opened while the paper is being
transported in the transport path of the erase unit.

Check item Measures

Covers Check if there is any dirt, deformation or damage on the covers.

Feed cover switch • Check if the switch is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Left upper cover switch • Check if the switch is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Left center cover switch • Check if the switch is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Right lower cover switch • Check if the switch is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Right upper cover switch • Check if the switch is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Left lower cover switch • Check if the switch is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses Check if the harnesses between each switch and the main board are dis-
connected or open circuited.
Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 24
Parts to be replaced Remark

Covers

Feed cover switch

Left upper cover switch

Left center cover switch

Right lower cover switch

Right upper cover switch

Left lower cover switch

Main board

[E110] Paper remaining at the feed sensor

Classification Error content


7
Paper remaining at the feed sen- Paper remains at the feed sensor while it is being transported in the trans-
sor port path of the erase unit.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Registration roller Clean the roller if it is dirty. Replace the roller if it is worn out.

Transport roller Clean the roller if it is dirty. Replace the roller if it is worn out.

Feed sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Feed motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the feed sensor and the main board is
disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the feed motor and the main board is dis-
connected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Registration roller

Transport roller

Feed sensor

Feed motor

Main board

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 25
[E111] Paper not reaching the registration sensor

Classification Error content

Paper not reaching the registration The registration sensor is not turned ON even though the specified time
sensor has passed after the paper has been aligned and the feed motor has been
restarted.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Registration roller Clean the roller if it is dirty. Replace the roller if it is worn out.

Transport roller Clean the roller if it is dirty. Replace the roller if it is worn out.

Registration sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Feed motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the registration sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the feed motor and the main board is dis-
connected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Registration sensor

Feed motor

Main board

[E112] Paper remaining at the registration sensor

Classification Error content

Paper remaining at the registration Paper remains at the registration sensor while it is being transported in the
sensor transport path of the erase unit.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Registration roller Clean the roller if it is dirty. Replace the roller if it is worn out.

Registration sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Feed motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 26
Check item Measures

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the registration sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the feed motor and the main board is dis-
connected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Registration roller

Registration sensor

Feed motor

Main board

[E113] Paper pull-up detection jam

7
Classification Error content

Paper pull-up detection jam Stapled paper is detected since its trailing edge has been pulled up at a
position exceeding the specified value after it has passed through the feed
sensor.

Check item Measures

Paper • Check if there are abnormal curls or folds on the paper.


• Check if the paper is placed properly or if it exceeds the maximum
weight allowed.

Multi feed paper sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Harness Check if the harness between the multi feed paper sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Multi feed paper sensor

Main board

[E114] Paper skew jam

Classification Error content

Paper skew jam The rear skew sensor is not turned OFF when the paper trailing edge has
been transported for a longer period than that specified time after the front
skew sensor has been turned OFF, or the opposite

Check item Measures

Paper • Check if there are abnormal curls or folds on the paper.


• Check if the paper is placed properly.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 27
Check item Measures

Pick-up roller Clean the roller if it is dirty. Replace the roller if it is worn out.

Feed roller Clean the roller if it is dirty. Replace the roller if it is worn out.

Separation roller Clean the roller if it is dirty. Replace the roller if it is worn out.

Front skew sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Rear skew sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the front skew sensor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the rear skew sensor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Pick-up roller

Feed roller

Separation roller

Front skew sensor

Rear skew sensor

Main board

[E115] Multiple paper feeding jam

Classification Error content

Multiple paper feeding jam Multiple paper feeding is detected when paper transport takes longer than
specified after the feed sensor has been turned ON.

Check item Measures

Paper • Check if there are abnormal curls or folds on the paper.


• Check if the paper is stapled.
• Check if the type and size of the paper falls within the range of specifi-
cations.

Separation roller Clean the roller if it is dirty. Replace the roller if it is worn out.

Multi feed paper sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harness Check if the harness between the multi feed paper sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Separation roller

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 28
Parts to be replaced Remark

Multi feed paper sensor

Main board

[E210] Paper remaining at the scanner entrance sensor

Classification Error content

Paper remaining at the scanner Paper remains at the scanner entrance sensor.
entrance sensor

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Scanner entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur- 7
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.
Scan motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.
• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the scanner entrance sensor and the
main board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the scan motor and the main board is dis-
connected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Scanner entrance sensor

Scan motor

Main board

[E211] Paper not reaching the scanner entrance sensor

Classification Error content

Paper not reaching the scanner The scanner entrance sensor is not turned ON when the paper has been
entrance sensor transported from the registration sensor and the specified time has passed.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Scanner entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Feed motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Erase unit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 29
Check item Measures

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the scanner entrance sensor and the
main board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the feed motor and the main board is dis-
connected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the erase unit motor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Scanner entrance sensor

Feed motor

Erase unit motor

Main board

[E212] Paper remaining at the scanner exit sensor

Classification Error content

Paper remaining at the scanner Paper remains at the scanner exit sensor.
exit sensor

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Scanner entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Scanner exit sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Feed motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Scan motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Reuse drawer exit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Speed adjustment motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
Harnesses • Check if the harness between the scanner exit sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the scan motor and the main board is dis-
connected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Scanner entrance sensor

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 30
Parts to be replaced Remark

Scanner exit sensor

Feed motor

Scan motor

Reuse drawer exit motor

Speed adjustment motor

Main board

[E213] Paper not reaching the scanner exit sensor

Classification Error content

Paper not reaching the scanner The scanner exit sensor is not turned ON when the paper has been trans-
exit sensor ported from the scanner entrance sensor and the specified time has
passed.
7

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.


Scanner entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.
• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Scanner exit sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Scan motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the scanner entrance sensor and the
main board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the scanner exit sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the scan motor and the main board is dis-
connected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Scanner entrance sensor

Scanner exit sensor

Scan motor

Main board

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 31
[E310] Paper remaining at the 1st transport sensor

Classification Error content

Paper remaining at the 1st trans- Paper remains at the 1st transport sensor.
port sensor

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

1st transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Speed adjustment motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the 1st transport sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the speed adjustment motor and the
main board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

1st transport sensor

Speed adjustment motor

Main board

[E311] Paper not reaching the 1st transport sensor

Classification Error content

Paper not reaching the 1st trans- The 1st transport sensor is not turned ON when the specified time has
port sensor passed after the paper has reached the scanner exit sensor.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

1st transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Speed adjustment motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Scan motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the 1st transport sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the scanner exit sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the scan motor and the main board is dis-
connected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 32
Parts to be replaced Remark

1st transport sensor

Speed adjustment motor

Scan motor

Main board

[E312] Paper remaining at the 2nd transport sensor

Classification Error content

Paper remaining at the 2nd trans- Paper remains at the 2nd transport sensor.
port sensor

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment. 7


2nd transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.
• Check if the connector is connected properly.
Speed adjustment motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.
• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the 2nd transport sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the speed adjustment motor and the
main board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

2nd transport sensor

Speed adjustment motor

Main board

[E313] Paper not reaching the 2nd transport sensor

Classification Error content

Paper not reaching the 2nd trans- The 2nd transport sensor is not turned ON when the specified time has
port sensor passed after the paper has reached the 1st transport sensor.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

2nd transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Speed adjustment motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 33
Check item Measures

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the 2nd transport sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the speed adjustment motor and the
main board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

2nd transport sensor

Speed adjustment motor

Main board

[E314] Paper remaining at the erase unit entrance sensor

Classification Error content

Paper remaining at the erase unit Paper remains at the erase unit entrance sensor.
entrance sensor

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Speed adjustment motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Erase unit entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the speed adjustment motor and the
main board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the erase unit entrance sensor and the
main board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Speed adjustment motor

Erase unit entrance sensor

Main board

[E315] Paper not reaching the erase unit entrance sensor

Classification Error content

Paper not reaching the erase unit The erase unit entrance sensor is not turned ON when the specified time
entrance sensor has passed after the paper has reached the 2nd transport sensor.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 34
Check item Measures

Speed adjustment motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Erase unit entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the speed adjustment motor and the
main board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the erase unit entrance sensor and the
main board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Speed adjustment motor

Erase unit entrance sensor


7
Main board

[E316] Paper remaining at the erase unit exit sensor

Classification Error content

Paper remaining at the erase unit Paper remains at the erase unit exit sensor.
exit sensor

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Erase unit exit sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Erase unit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the erase unit exit sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the erase unit motor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Erase unit exit sensor

Erase unit motor

Main board

[E317] Paper not reaching the erase unit exit sensor

Classification Error content

Paper not reaching the erase unit The erase unit exit sensor is not turned ON when the specified time has
exit sensor passed after the paper has reached the erase unit entrance sensor.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 35
Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Cooling guide Check if the cooling guide is dirty. Clean the cooling guide if it is stained.

Erase unit exit sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Speed adjustment motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Erase unit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the erase unit exit sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the speed adjustment motor and the
main board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the erase unit motor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Cooling guide

Erase unit exit sensor

Speed adjustment motor

Erase unit motor

Main board

[E318] Paper remaining at the 3rd transport sensor

Classification Error content

Paper remaining at the 3rd trans- Paper remains at the 3rd transport sensor.
port sensor

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

3rd transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Erase unit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the 3rd transport sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the erase unit motor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

3rd transport sensor

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 36
Parts to be replaced Remark

Erase unit motor

Main board

[E319] Paper not reaching the 3rd transport sensor

Classification Error content

Paper not reaching the 3rd trans- The 3rd transport sensor is not turned ON when the specified time has
port sensor passed after the paper has reached the erase unit exit sensor.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Cooling guide Check if the cooling guide is dirty. Clean the cooling guide if it is stained.

3rd transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly. 7


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Erase unit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the 3rd transport sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the erase unit motor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

3rd transport sensor

Erase unit motor

Main board

[E320] Paper remaining at the 4th transport sensor

Classification Error content

Paper remaining at the 4th trans- Paper remains at the 4th transport sensor while the paper is being trans-
port sensor ported in the paper path of the erase unit.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

4th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Erase unit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Scan motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 37
Check item Measures

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the 4th transport sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the erase unit motor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the scan motor and the main board is dis-
connected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

4th transport sensor

Erase unit motor

Scan motor

Main board

[E321] Paper not reaching the 4th transport sensor

Classification Error content

Paper not reaching the 4th trans- The 4th transport sensor is not turned ON when the specified time has
port sensor passed after the paper has reached the 3rd transport sensor.

Check item Measures


Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

4th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Erase unit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the 4th transport sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the erase unit motor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

3rd transport sensor

4th transport sensor

Erase unit motor

Main board

[E410] Paper remaining at the exit path sensor

Classification Error content

Paper remaining at the exit path Paper remains at the exit path sensor.
sensor

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 38
Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Exit path sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Scan motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Reuse drawer exit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the exit path sensor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the scan motor and the main board is dis-
connected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the reuse drawer exit motor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
7
Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Exit path sensor

Scan motor

Reuse drawer exit motor

Main board

[E411] Paper not reaching the exit path sensor

Classification Error content

Paper not reaching the exit path The exit path sensor is not turned ON when the specified time has passed
sensor after the paper has reached the scanner exit sensor.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Exit path sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Scan motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the exit path sensor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the scan motor and the main board is dis-
connected or open circuited.
Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Exit path sensor

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 39
Parts to be replaced Remark

Scan motor

Main board

[E412] Paper remaining at the reuse drawer entrance sensor

Classification Error content

Paper remaining at the reuse Paper remains at the reuse drawer entrance sensor.
drawer entrance sensor

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Reuse drawer entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Reuse drawer exit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the reuse drawer entrance sensor and
the main board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the reuse drawer exit motor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Reuse drawer entrance sensor

Reuse drawer exit motor

Main board

[E413] Paper not reaching the reuse drawer entrance sensor

Classification Error content

Paper not reaching the reuse The reuse drawer entrance sensor is not turned ON when the specified
drawer entrance sensor time has passed after the paper has reached the exit path sensor.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Reuse drawer entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Exit path sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Reuse drawer exit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 40
Check item Measures

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the reuse drawer entrance sensor and
the main board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the exit path sensor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the reuse drawer exit motor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Reuse drawer entrance sensor

Exit path sensor

Reuse drawer exit motor

Main board

[E414] Paper remaining at the 5th transport sensor 7

Classification Error content

Paper remaining at the 5th trans- Paper remains at the 5th transport sensor.
port sensor

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

5th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Reuse drawer exit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the 5th transport sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the reuse drawer exit motor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

5th transport sensor

Reuse drawer exit motor

Main board

[E415] Paper not reaching the 5th transport sensor

Classification Error content

Paper not reaching the 5th trans- The 5th transport sensor is not turned ON when the specified time has
port sensor passed after the paper has reached the reuse drawer entrance sensor.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 41
Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

5th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Reuse drawer exit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Reject drawer gate solenoid • Check if the solenoid is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the reuse drawer entrance sensor and
the main board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the 5th transport sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the reuse drawer exit motor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the reject drawer gate solenoid and the
main board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

5th transport sensor

Reuse drawer exit motor

Reject drawer gate solenoid

Main board

[E416] Paper remaining at the 6th transport sensor

Classification Error content

Paper remaining at the 6th trans- Paper remains at the 6th transport sensor.
port sensor

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

6th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.
Reuse drawer exit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.
• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the 6th transport sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the reuse drawer exit motor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 42
Parts to be replaced Remark

6th transport sensor

Reuse drawer exit motor

Main board

[E417] Paper not reaching the 6th transport sensor

Classification Error content

Paper not reaching the 6th trans- The 6th transport sensor is not turned ON when the specified time has
port sensor passed after the paper has reached the 5th transport sensor.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

5th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly. 7


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

6th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Reuse drawer exit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses • Check if the harness between the 5th transport sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the 6th transport sensor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Check if the harness between the reuse drawer exit motor and the main
board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

5th transport sensor

6th transport sensor

Reuse drawer exit motor

Main board

[E420] Reuse drawer open jam

Classification Error content

Reuse drawer open jam The reuse drawer sensor is turned OFF during its operation.

Check item Measures

Reuse drawer sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harness Check if the harness between the reuse drawer sensor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 43
Check item Measures

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Reuse drawer sensor

Main board

[E421] Reject drawer open jam

Classification Error content

Reject drawer open jam The reject drawer sensor is turned OFF during its operation.

Check item Measures

Reject drawer sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harness Check if the harness between the reject drawer sensor and the main board
is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Reject drawer sensor


Main board

[E510] Pick-up roller home position sensor abnormality

Classification Error content

Pick-up roller home position sen- The pick-up roller home position sensor is not switched from ON to OFF, or
sor abnormality from OFF to ON when the pick-up roller movement motor has been driven
and the specified time has passed.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Pick-up roller movement motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Pick-up roller home position sen- • Check if the sensor is operating properly.
sor • Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harness Check if the harness between the pick-up roller home position sensor and
the main board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark


Pick-up roller movement motor

Pick-up roller home position sen-


sor

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 44
Parts to be replaced Remark

Main board

[E610] Reuse drawer aligning roller position sensor abnormality

Classification Error content

Reuse drawer aligning roller posi- The reuse drawer aligning roller position sensor is not switched from ON to
tion sensor abnormality OFF, or from OFF to ON, when the reuse drawer aligning roller lift motor
has been driven and the specified time has passed.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

Reuse drawer aligning roller lift • Check if the motor is operating properly.
motor • Check if the connector is connected properly.

Reuse drawer aligning roller posi- • Check if the sensor is operating properly. 7
tion sensor • Check if the connector is connected properly.
Harnesses • Check if the harness between the reuse drawer aligning roller lift motor
and the main board is disconnected or open circuited.
• Aligning roller lift motor and the main board is disconnected or open cir-
cuited. Check if the harness between the reuse drawer aligning roller
position sensor and the main board is disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Reuse drawer aligning roller lift


motor

Reuse drawer aligning roller posi-


tion sensor

Main board

[E700] Paper detection sensor sequence abnormality

Classification Error content

Paper detection sensor sequence An abnormality is detected in the ON/OFF of the paper detection sensor
abnormality during its operation.

Check item Measures

Exit path sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

1st transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

2nd transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 45
Check item Measures

Erase unit entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Erase unit exit sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

3rd transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

4th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

5th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

6th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Reuse drawer entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harnesses Check if the harnesses between each transport sensor and the main board
are disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Exit path sensor

1st transport sensor

2nd transport sensor

Erase unit entrance sensor

Erase unit exit sensor

3rd transport sensor

4th transport sensor

5th transport sensor

6th transport sensor

Reuse drawer entrance sensor

Main board

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 46
7.3.4 Error
[C010] Feed motor abnormality
[C020] Separation motor abnormality
[C030] Scan motor abnormality
[C040] Speed adjustment motor abnormality
[C060] Reuse drawer exit motor abnormality
[C070] Pick-up roller movement motor abnormality
[C080] Reuse drawer aligning roller lift motor abnormality

Classification Error content

Motor abnormality An abnormality occurs in an output signal to the motor.

Check item Measures

Main board • Main board check


• Main board replacement

Parts to be replaced Remark


7
Main board

[C050] Erase unit motor abnormality

Classification Error content

Motor abnormality An abnormality occurs in an output signal to the motor.

Check item Measures

Main board • Main board check


• Main board replacement

Erase unit motor • Check if the motor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harness Check if the harness between the erase unit motor and the main board is
disconnected or open circuited.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Main board

Erase unit motor

[C410] Thermistor disconnection

Classification Error content

Thermistor abnormality The connector of the thermistor is not connected.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 47
Check item Measures

Thermistors Check if the connectors for the following thermistors are connected prop-
erly.
• Heat roller-1 center thermistor
• Heat roller-1 side thermistor
• Heat roller-2 center thermistor
• Heat roller-2 side thermistor

Harnesses Check if the harnesses of the following thermistors are open circuited.
• Heat roller-1 center thermistor
• Heat roller-1 side thermistor
• Heat roller-2 center thermistor
• Heat roller-2 side thermistor

Main board • Main board check


• Main board replacement

Counter After the above measures against the error are performed, shift the mode of
the MFP to the self-diagnosis mode. Set “0” in the counter of the code
7120. Turn the power OFF and then back ON.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Harness

Main board

[C420] Upper limit abnormality in the heat roller-1 temperature

Classification Error content

Temperature abnormality The heat roller-1 center thermistor of the heat roller-1 side thermistor
detects that the upper limit temperature has been exceeded.

Check item Measures

Heat roller-1 center thermistor • Check if the connectors of the heat roller-1 center thermistor and the
Heat roller-1 side thermistor heat roller-1 side thermistor are connected properly.
• Check if the harness is open circuited.
• Check that the thermistors contact the heat roller surface and are
installed properly.
• Check if there is any dirt or deformation on the thermistors.

Main board • Main board check


• Main board replacement

Counter After the above measures against the error are performed, shift the mode of
the MFP to the self-diagnosis mode. Set "0" in the counter of the code
7120. Turn the power OFF and then back ON.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Heat roller-1 center thermistor


Heat roller-1 side thermistor

Main board

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 48
[C421] Lower limit abnormality in the heat roller-1 temperature

Classification Error content

Temperature abnormality • The temperature detected by the heat roller-1 center thermistor or the
heat roller-1 side thermistor does not exceed the lower limit.
• There is a difference which is or exceeds the specified value between
the temperature detected by the heat roller-1 center thermistor and the
heat roller-1 side thermistor.

Check item Measures

Power supply board Disconnect the power cable from the equipment and then take off the
power supply board.
Measure the resistance value of the power supply board. As for the por-
tions to be measured, shown below.
- CN503 3 pin - PC1_4 pin
- CN503 3 pin - PC2_4 pin
If the measured value is out of the range, the power supply board may be
damaged. In this case, replace it.
7
Heat roller-1 center thermistor • Check if the connectors of the heat roller-1 center thermistor and the
Heat roller-1 side thermistor heat roller-1 side thermistor are connected properly.
• Check if the harness is open circuited.
• Check that the thermistors contact the heat roller surface and are
installed properly.
• Check if there is any dirt or deformation on the thermistors.

Heat roller-1 center thermostat • Check the gap between the thermostat and the heat roller. Check that
the thermostat is installed properly.
• Check if the thermostat is damaged or open circuited. Check if any for-
eign matter is attached to the thermostat.

Heat roller-1 lamp • Check that the connector of the heat roller-1 lamp is connected prop-
erly.
• Check if the heat roller-1 lamp is damaged or open circuited.

Main board • Main board check


• Main board replacement

Counter After the above measures against the error are performed, shift the mode of
the MFP to the self-diagnosis mode. Set "0" in the counter of the code
7120. Turn the power OFF and then back ON.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Power supply board

Heat roller-1 center thermistor


Heat roller-1 side thermistor

Heat roller-1 center thermostat

Heat roller-1 lamp

Main board

[C422] Upper limit abnormality in the heat roller-2 temperature

Classification Error content

Temperature abnormality The heat roller-2 center thermistor of the heat roller-2 side thermistor
detects that the upper limit temperature has been exceeded.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 49
Check item Measures

Heat roller-2 center thermistor • Check if the connectors of the heat roller-2 center thermistor and the
Heat roller-2 side thermistor heat roller-2 side thermistor are connected properly.
• Check if the harness is open circuited.
• Check that the thermistors contact the heat roller surface and are
installed properly.
• Check if there is any dirt or deformation on the thermistors.

Main board • Main board check


• Main board replacement

Counter After the above measures against the error are performed, shift the mode of
the MFP to the self-diagnosis mode. Set "0" in the counter of the code
7120. Turn the power OFF and then back ON.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Heat roller-2 center thermistor


Heat roller-2 side thermistor

Main board

[C423] Lower limit abnormality in the heat roller-2 temperature

Classification Error content

Temperature abnormality • The temperature detected by the heat roller-2 center thermistor or the
heat roller-2 side thermistor does not exceed the lower limit.
• There is a difference which is or exceeds the specified value between
the temperature detected by the heat roller-2 center thermistor and the
heat roller-2 side thermistor.

Check item Measures

Power supply board Disconnect the power cable from the equipment and then take off the
power supply board.
Measure the resistance value of the power supply board. As for the por-
tions to be measured, shown below.
- CN503 3 pin - PC1_4 pin
- CN503 3 pin - PC2_4 pin
If the measured value is out of the range, the power supply board may be
damaged. In this case, replace it.

Heat roller-2 center thermistor • Check if the connectors of the heat roller-2 center thermistor and the
Heat roller-2 side thermistor heat roller-2 side thermistor are connected properly.
• Check if the harness is open circuited.
• Check that the thermistors contact the heat roller surface and are
installed properly.
• Check if there is any dirt or deformation on the thermistors.

Heat roller-2 center thermostat • Check the gap between the thermostat and the heat roller. Check that
the thermostat is installed properly.
• Check if the thermostat is damaged or open circuited. Check if any for-
eign matter is attached to the thermostat.

Main board • Main board check


• Main board replacement

Counter After the above measures against the error are performed, shift the mode of
the MFP to the self-diagnosis mode. Set "0" in the counter of the code
7120. Turn the power OFF and then back ON.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 50
Parts to be replaced Remark

Power supply board

Heat roller-2 center thermistor


Heat roller-2 side thermistor

Heat roller-2 center thermostat

Heat roller-2 lamp

Main board

[C510] Scanner communication error


[C511] Scanner connection error

Classification Error content

Scanner abnormality A communication error occurs between the main board and the scanner
board. A signal line between the main board and the scanner board is not
connected. The CCD unit is not connected. 7

Check item Measures

Scanner board • Scanner board check


• Power supply check (5 V) for the scanner board
• Connector check (CN2, T-CN1, B-CN1) for the scanner board
• Firmware update for the scanner board

Harness Harness check between the scanner board and the main board

Main board • Main board check


• Power supply check (5 V) for the main board
• Connector check (CN1) for the main board
• Firmware update for the main board

CCD • CCD unit check


• Connector check for the CCD unit (breaking, direction and connecting
status of the flat cable)

Parts to be replaced Remark

Scanner board

Main board

Harness

[C512] Scanner calibration error

Classification Error content

Scanner abnormality A calibration error occurs in the scanner section.

Check item Measures

Shading sheet Clean the sheet.

Shading motor • Drive check for the shading motor (ON: 1003-2009, OFF: 1003-2058)
• Connector check for the shading motor

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 51
Check item Measures

Scanner board • Scanner board check


• Connector check (CN1) for the scanner board

Parts to be replaced Remark

Shading sheet

Shading motor

Harness

[C514] Scanner board – system control board communication error

Classification Error content

Scanner abnormality A communication error occurs between the scanner board and the system
control board.

Check item Measures

Power Turn the power OFF and then back ON

Scanner board • Scanner board check


• Connector check (USB) for the scanner board
• Firmware update for the scanner board

System control board • System control board check


• Connector check (USB) for the system control board
• Firmware update for the system control board

USB cable USB cable check between the scanner board and the system control board

Parts to be replaced Remark

Scanner board

System control board

USB cable

[C600] Main board - system control board communication error

Classification Error content

System control board abnormality A communication error occurs between the main board and the system
control board.

Check item Measures

System control board • System control board check


• Connector check (CN5) for the system control board
• Firmware update for the system control board

Harness Harness check between the system control board and the main board
Main board • Main board check
• Connector check (CN12) for the main board
• Firmware update for the main board

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 52
Parts to be replaced Remark

System control board

Harness

Main board

[C912] Log overwriting error

Classification Error content

Power supply abnormality An internal log writing error occurs when the power is turned OFF.

Check item Measures

None Turn the power OFF and then back ON.

[C920] 100/200 V power supply abnormality 7

Classification Error content

Power supply abnormality A power failure occurs.

Check item Measures

None Turn the power OFF and then back ON.

[C930] Voltage in the battery decreased

Classification Error content

Voltage in the battery decreased The voltage in the backup battery has gone down.

Check item Measures

Main board battery • Replace the battery.


• Check if the battery is attached properly.

Main board • Replace the battery.


• Check that there is no abnormality on the main board.

Setting Set the date and time after the battery is replaced.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Battery

Main board

[C950] SYS board cooling fan lock abnormality

Classification Error content

Cooling fan abnormality The lock of the motor of the SYS board cooling fan is detected.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 53
Check item Measures

Main board • Main board check


• Connector check (CN14) for the main board
System control board • System control board check
• 12 V output check

SYS board cooling fan Check if the fan rotates properly

Parts to be replaced Remark

Main board

System control board

SYS board cooling fan

[CB10] Main program error

Classification Error content

Main board abnormality The main program of the firmware is broken.


A power failure occurs during firmware updating, or firmware updating fails.

Check item Measures

USB device • Check if the stored file is valid.


• Check if there is any abnormality in the USB device.

Main board Main board check

firmware Update the firmware of the main board.

Parts to be replaced Remark

USB device

Main board

[CB11] Boot program error

Classification Error content

Main board abnormality The boot program of the firmware is broken.

Check item Measures


Main board Main board check

Parts to be replaced Remark

Main board

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 54
[CB12] Program overwriting error

Classification Error content

Main board abnormality An error occurs during the firmware update.

Check item Measures

USB device • Check if the stored file is valid.


• Check if there is any abnormality in the USB device.

Parts to be replaced Remark

USB device

[CB13] RAM abnormality


[CB14] SRAM abnormality

Classification Error content


7
Main board abnormality A writing or reading error to the main board RAM occurs.

Check item Measures

Main board Main board check

Parts to be replaced Remark

Main board

[CB15] Flash ROM overwriting error

Classification Error content

Main board abnormality A writing error to the main board Flash ROM occurs.

Check item Measures

Main board Main board check

Parts to be replaced Remark

Main board

[CE00] USB device abnormality

Classification Error content

Communication error A reading or writing error to a USB device occurs.

Check item Measures

USB device Check if the stored file is valid.

Main board Main board check (USB connector)

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 55
Parts to be replaced Remark

USB device

Main board

[CE10] Communication error between the main board and the scanner board

Classification Error content

Communication error A serial communication error occurs between the main board and the scan-
ner board.

Check item Measures

Scanner board abnormality • Scanner board check


• Connector check (CN2) for the scanner board

Harness Harness check between the scanner board and the main board

Main board abnormality • Main board check


• Connector check (CN1) for the main board

Parts to be replaced Remark

Scanner board

Main board

Harness

[CE20] Ink printer connection error

Classification Error content

Ink printer abnormality A communication error occurs between the ink printer board and the main
board.

Check item Measures

Ink printer board abnormality • Ink printer board check


• Connector check for the ink printer board

Harness Harness check between the ink printer board and the main board

Main board abnormality • Main board check


• Connector check for the main board

Parts to be replaced Remark

Ink printer board

Main board

Harness

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 56
[F010] System error

Classification Error content

System error The system does not start after the power has been turned ON.

Check item Measures

System board abnormality • Reboot the equipment


• Replace the system board

Parts to be replaced Remark

System board

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 57
7.3.5 File sharing related error
[2D10] Storing documents in a shared storage folder or a USB device failed.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error System access abnormality

Check item Measures

Setting • Delete some files in the shared folder by using Explorer because of
automatic/manual file deletion failure.
• Turn the power OFF and then back ON, and reattempt the job in error.

[2D11] Storing documents in a shared folder or a USB device failed.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error Insufficient memory

Check item Measures

Setting If there is a job in process, reattempt the job in error after the job in process
is finished. If the error still occurs, turn the power OFF and then back ON,
and reattempt the job.

[2D14] Storing documents in a shared folder or a USB device failed.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error Invalid parameter

Check item Measures

Setting If a template is used, recreate the template. If the error still occurs, turn the
power OFF and then back ON, and reattempt the job.

[2D30] Storing documents in a shared folder or a USB device failed.


[2D31] Storing documents in a USB device failed.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error [2D30] Directory creation failure


[2D31] File creation failure

Check item Measures

Setting • Check if write access to a storage directory is given.


• Check if a server or a local folder has a sufficient space in the disk
capacity.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 58
[2D34] Directory creation failed during management scanning.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error Directory creation failure

Check item Measures

Setting • Confirm that the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
• Confirm that the directory has sufficient space.
• Set the network path or file name to a shorter one.
• If the error still persists, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and
reattempt it.

[2D35] File creation or logging on failed during management scanning.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error File creation failure 7

Check item Measures

Setting • Confirm that the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
• Confirm that the user name and password are correct.
• Confirm that the directory has sufficient space.
• Set the network path or file name to a shorter one.
• If the error still persists, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and
reattempt it.

[2D36] Copy file creation failed during management scanning.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error File creation failure

Check item Measures

Setting Turn the power OFF and then back ON, and reattempt management scan-
ning.
If the error still persists, contact your service representative.

[2D37] Network connection failed during management scanning.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error File server connection error

Check item Measures

Setting • Confirm that the LAN cable is connected properly.


• Confirm the IP address and path of the server, and reattempt
management scanning.
• Confirm that the server works appropriately.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 59
[2D38] Memory became full during management scanning.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error Storage capacity full failure during processing

Check item Measures

Setting • Confirm that the LAN cable is connected properly.


• Confirm that the directory has sufficient space.
• Delete the files in the shared folder, and reattempt management scan-
ning.

[2D40] Conversion of an image file format failed.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error [2D40] Image conversion abnormality

Check item Measures

System control board • Turn the power OFF and then back ON, and reattempt the job in error.
• Replace the system control board and reattempt the job.

[2D60] Storing documents in a shared folder or a USB device failed.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error File library access abnormality

Check item Measures

Setting Turn the power OFF and then back ON, and reattempt the scanning.

[2D62] Connecting to a destination network failed.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error File server connection error

Check item Measures


Server • Check the IP address or path of the server.
• Check if the server is operating properly.

[2D63] Connecting to a network path failed.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error Invalid network path

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 60
Check item Measures

Setting Check the network path. If it is correct, turn the power OFF and then back
ON, and reattempt the job.

[2D64] Connecting to a file server failed.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error Login failure

Check item Measures

Setting Reset the login user name and password, and perform the job. Check if the
account setting of the file server is correct.

[2D65] Creation of a new document failed since too many data have been stored in the folder. 7

Classification Error content

File sharing related error Creation of a new document failed since the number of documents in the
folder has exceeded the maximum allowed

Check item Measures

Server Delete unnecessary documents in the folder.

[2D66] Storage folder becomes full while data are being stored.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error Storage capacity full failure during processing

Check item Measures

Setting • Delete jobs being set or in process, or those such as HOLD, PRIVATE,
PROOF or INVALID jobs. Then reattempt the job in error.
• Decrease the number of pages or the resolution of the job in error, and
reattempt it.
• Check that a server or a local folder has a sufficient space in the disk
capacity.

[2DC1] A scan job is interrupted due to power failure.

Classification Error content

File sharing related error Power failure

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 61
Check item Measures

Power supply • Check that the power cable is connected properly or is inserted
securely.
• Check if the power supply voltage is unstable.

Remark:
In the scanning or management scanning function, if storage or transferring of an image failed,
its file is temporarily stored in a SSD.
An administrator can export an image file in a SSD to a USB device by selecting [Copy files to
USB] in the [ADMIN] menu.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 62
7.3.6 System error
[10001], [10002], [10003], [10008], [10100], [20004], [20005], [30002] Software internal error

Classification Error content

System error Software internal error

Check item Measures

Setting 1. Reboot the equipment.


2. If the error still occurs, reinstall the firmware.

SSD Connector check

SYS board • Board check


• Connector check

Parts to be replaced Remark

SSD 7
SYS board

[10005] Scanner internal error

Classification Error content

System error Scanner internal error

Check item Measures

Scanner board • Board check


• Connector check

SSD Connector check

Harness Check the harness connecting the scanner and the SYS board.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Scanner board

SSD

Harness

[10006] Paper detection time-out error


[10007] Paper transport time-out error

Classification Error content

System error Paper is not transported within the specified timing.

Check item Measures

Paper Check if there is any paper remaining in the equipment.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 63
Check item Measures

Feed sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Registration sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Scanner entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Scanner exit sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Exit path sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

1st transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

2nd transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
Erase unit entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.
• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

Erase unit exit sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

3rd transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

4th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

5th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.
• Check if there is any object shielding the sensor light on the sensor sur-
face. Remove it if there is and clean the sensor surface.

6th transport sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Reuse drawer entrance sensor • Check if the sensor is operating properly.


• Check if the connector is connected properly.

Harness Check if the harnesses between each transport sensor and the main board
are disconnected or open circuited.

Main board Check if the main board is damaged.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Feed sensor

Registration sensor

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 64
Parts to be replaced Remark
Scanner entrance sensor

Scanner exit sensor

Exit path sensor

1st transport sensor

2nd transport sensor

Erase unit entrance sensor

Erase unit exit sensor

3rd transport sensor

4th transport sensor

5th transport sensor

6th transport sensor

Reuse drawer entrance sensor


7
Harness

Main board

[10009] Shading error

Classification Error content

System error Command error

Check item Measures

Shading sheet Clean the sheet.

Shading motor • Drive check for the shading motor (ON: 1003-2009, OFF: 1003-2058)
• Connector check for the shading motor
Scanner board • Scanner board check
• Connector check (CN1) for the scanner board

Parts to be replaced Remark

Shading sheet

Shading motor

Scanner board

[10010] Heat roller ON signal error

Classification Error content

System error Command error

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 65
Check item Measures

Heat roller-1 center thermistor • Check if the connectors of the heat roller-1 center thermistor and the
Heat roller-1 side thermistor heat roller-1 side thermistor are connected properly
• Check if the harness is open circuited.
• Check that the thermistors contact the heat roller surface and are
installed properly.
• Check if there is any dirt or deformation on the thermistors.

Heat roller-1 center thermostat • Check the gap between the thermostat and the heat roller.
• Check that the thermostat is installed properly.
• Check if the thermostat is damaged or open circuited.
• Check if any foreign matter is attached to the thermostat.

Heat roller-1 lamp • Check that the connector of the heat roller-1 lamp is connected prop-
erly.
• Check if the heat roller-1 lamp is damaged or open circuited.

Heat roller-2 center thermistor • Check if the connectors of the heat roller-2 center thermistor and the
Heat roller-2 side thermistor heat roller-2 side thermistor are connected properly.
• Check if the harness is open circuited.
• Check that the thermistors contact the heat roller surface and are
installed properly.
• Check if there is any dirt or deformation on the thermistors.
Heat roller-2 center thermostat • Check the gap between the thermostat and the heat roller.
• Check that the thermostat is installed properly.
• Check if the thermostat is damaged or open circuited.
• Check if any foreign matter is attached to the thermostat.

Heat roller-2 lamp • Check that the connector of the heat roller-2 lamp is connected prop-
erly.
• Check if the heat roller-2 lamp is damaged or open circuited.

Main board • Main board check


• Main board replacement

Counter After the above measures against the error are performed, shift the mode of
the MFP to the self-diagnosis mode. Set “0” in the counter of the code
7120. Turn the power OFF and then back ON.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Heat roller-1 center thermistor


Heat roller-1 side thermistor

Heat roller-1 center thermostat

Heat roller-1 lamp

Heat roller-2 center thermistor


Heat roller-2 side thermistor

Heat roller-2 center thermostat

Heat roller-2 lamp

Main board

[20003] No paper error

Classification Error content

System error No paper error

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 66
Check item Measures

Paper Set paper.

[20006] Software internal error (Memory is full)

Classification Error content

System error Software internal error (Memory is full)

Check item Measures

Setting • Reboot the equipment.


• Store the file in [USER FUNCTIONS] - [ADMIN] - “SAVE TO USB
MEDIA”.
• Create a clone file in [Administration] - [Maintenance] - [Create Clone
File] in TopAccess.
• Return the setting to the factory default in [USER FUNCTIONS] - 7
[ADMIN] - [INITIALIZE].
• Install a clone file in [Administration] - [Maintenance] - [Install Clone File]
in TopAccess.

SSD Connector check

SYS board • Board check


• Connector check

Parts to be replaced Remark

SSD

SYS board

[20007] Paper amount excess error

Classification Error content

System error Paper amount excess error

Check item Measures

Setting Press the [CANCEL] button to return to the previous menu, and then the
[START] button to restart the job.

[30001] Power failure error

Classification Error content

System error Power failure error

Check item Measures

Setting Turn the power OFF and then back ON.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 67
[30021], [30022], [30023], [30024], [30025], [30026] Software internal error

Classification Error content

System error Software internal error

Check item Measures

Setting Reboot the equipment.

[F120] Database abnormality

Classification Error content

System error The database is not operating normally.

Check item Measures

Setting 1. Reboot the equipment.


2. If the error still occurs, reinstall the firmware.

[F121] Database abnormality (user information management database)

Classification Error content

System error Login after the equipment startup in any of starting modes becomes impos-
sible because the user information management database is corrupted.

Check item Measures

Setting 1. Reboot the equipment.


2. If the error still occurs, reinstall the firmware.

[F122] Database abnormality (log management database)

Classification Error content

System error Login after the equipment startup in any of starting modes becomes impos-
sible because log the management database is corrupted.

Check item Measures

Setting 1. Reboot the equipment.


2. If the error still occurs, reinstall the firmware.

[F600] Firmware update error

Classification Error content

System error The firmware update failed.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 68
Check item Measures

Setting Reinstall the firmware in error.

[F902] System firmware / system software model information error

Classification Error content

System error The system firmware and the model information of the system software are
not correct.

Check item Measures

Setting 1. Check the model name and firmware.


2. Install firmware corresponding to the model name.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 69
7.3.7 Access related error
[6007] Unsuccessful User Login to equipment

Classification Error content

Access error User authentication cannot be done because connection to the authentica-
tion server has failed.

Check item Measures

Setting Check if the operating status of the server and connection from the equip-
ment have been confirmed.

[6042] Card authentication failed due to an incorrect setting.

Classification Error content

Access error The self-diagnostic code setting is not correct for card authentication.

Check item Measures

Setting Set the correct self-diagnostic code.

[6131] MFP fail to verify clock with Time Server

Classification Error content

Access error The equipment is not synchronized with the SNTP server.

Check item Measures

Setting - Check that the SNTP server is operating correctly.


- Check that the path to the SNTP server is operating correctly.
- Check that the settings are correct in TopAccess
-> [Administrator] -> [Setup] -> [General] -> [SNTP Service].

7.3.8 Maintenance error


[7101] System firmware update failed.
[7103] Engine firmware update failed.
[7105] Scanner firmware update failed.
[710F] Language package installation failed.
[7111] Patch installation failed.

Classification Error content

Maintenance error Firmware installation failed.

Check item Measures


Setting The software package file may have a problem or may be corrupted. Check
the software package file and then reattempt the installation.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 70
[7123] Unsuccessful Import of Template Data
[7129] Unsuccessful Import of User Information
[712D] Unsuccessful Import of Department Data

Classification Error content

Maintenance error [7123] Unsuccessful Import of Template Data


[7129] Unsuccessful Import of User Information
[712D] Unsuccessful Import of Department Data

Check item Measures

Setting Check whether the file which it was going to import is right.

[7132] Failed to import any users

Classification Error content


7
Maintenance error Failed to import any users

Check item Measures

Setting The number of cases which can be registered was exceeded in the middle
of import, or some data may have unjust information. Check that the file
which it was going to import is right, and the registration number.

[7134] Failed to import any department code

Classification Error content

Maintenance error Failed to import any department code

Check item Measures

Setting Check whether there are availabilities of enough of SSD and perform again.

[7143] Unsuccessful export of template data


[7149] Unsuccessful export of user information
[714B] Unsuccessful export of role information
[714D] Unsuccessful export of department information

Classification Error content

Maintenance error [7143] Unsuccessful export of template data


[7149] Unsuccessful export of user information
[714B] Unsuccessful export of role information
[714D] Unsuccessful export of department information

Check item Measures

Setting Check whether there are availabilities of enough of SSD and perform again.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 71
[7151] Unsuccessful export of log data

Classification Error content

Maintenance error [7151] Unsuccessful export of log data

Check item Measures

Setting Check whether there are availabilities of enough of SSD and media, and
perform again.

[716B] Reset of the section counter went wrong

Classification Error content

Maintenance error Reset of the section counter went wrong

Check item Measures

Setting Reset of the section counter went wrong.

[7188] Unsuccessful user password modification

Classification Error content

Maintenance error Unsuccessful user password modification due to policy violation failed in
modification.

Check item Measures

Setting Unsuccessful user password modification due to policy violation failed in


modification because of password policy violation at modification of user
password. Change user password -> failure of checking of password.

[7191] DDNS public key file upload failed

Classification Error content

Maintenance error DDNS public key file upload failed

Check item Measures

Setting

[7193] DDNS private key file upload failure

Classification Error content

Maintenance error DDNS private key file upload failure

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 72
Check item Measures

Setting

[71D0] Factory default failure

Classification Error content

Maintenance error Factory default failure

Check item Measures

Setting

[71F1] Unsuccessful creation of clone file

7
Classification Error content

Maintenance error Unsuccessful creation of clone file

Check item Measures

Setting Check whether there are availabilities of enough of SSD and USB media,
and perform again.

[71F3] Unsuccessful import of clone data

Classification Error content

Maintenance error Unsuccessful import of clone data

Check item Measures


Setting There is a possibility that the file has broken. Perform again after a check.

[71F4] Failed to decrypt Clone file

Classification Error content

Maintenance error Failed to decrypt clone file

Check item Measures

Setting There is a possibility that the file has broken. Or there is a possibility that
the password is wrong. Perform again after a check.

[71F5] Failed to encrypt clone file

Classification Error content

Maintenance error Failed to encrypt clone file

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 73
Check item Measures

Setting Perform again after a reboot.

7.3.9 Network error


[8000] Static IPv4 address conflict

Classification Error content

Network error IPv4 address overlaps.

Check item Measures

Setting Check if the same IP address is not used by other machine.

[8011] Linklocal Address Conflict

Classification Error content

Network error Linklocal Address Conflict

Check item Measures

Setting Check if the same IP address is not used by other machine.

[8012] Manual Address Conflict

Classification Error content

Network error Manual IPv6 Address Conflict

Check item Measures

Setting Check if the same IP address is not used by other machine.

[8013] Stateless Address Conflict

Classification Error content

Network error Stateless Address Conflict

Check item Measures

Setting Check if the same IP address is not used by other machine.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 74
[8014] Stateful Address Conflict

Classification Error content

Network error Stateful Address Conflict

Check item Measures

Setting Check if the same IP address is not used by other machine.

[8061] Secure primary DDNS update error


[8062] Secure update to secondary IPv4 server failed
[8063] Secure update to primary IPv6 server failed
[8064] Secure update to secondary IPv6 server failed
[8065] IPv6 primary DDNS update error
[8066] IPv6 secondary DDNS update error
[8067] IPv4 primary DDNS update error
[8068] IPv4 secondary DDNS update error 7

Classification Error content

Network error [8061] Secure update to primary IPv4 server failed


[8062] Secure update to secondary IPv4 server failed
[8063] Secure update to primary IPv6 server failed
[8064] Secure update to secondary IPv6 server failed
[8065] IPv6 primary DDNS update error
[8066] IPv6 secondary DDNS update error
[8067] IPv4 primary DDNS update error
[8068] IPv4 secondary DDNS update error

Check item Measures

Setting Check if there is any problem with DNS or DDNS settings.

[8069] Invalid TSIG/SIG(0) Key file

Classification Error content

Network error This message is displayed when the key file for SIG(0) or TSIG is invalid.

Check item Measures

Setting Verify the TSIG/SIG(0) key files used.

[812C] Secure update date/time is not correct


[812D] LDAP date/time is not correct

Classification Error content

Network error [812C] Secure update date/time is not correct


[812D] LDAP date/time is not correct

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 75
Check item Measures

Setting Check whether server and PRD time is in sync

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 76
7.4 Other troubleshooting

7.4.1 Troubleshooting for the scanning image


If the scanned images are defective because of streaks, clean the slit glasses and the shading sheet of
the scanning section.

[ 1 ] How to clean the slit glass


Note:
Be sure to use a soft cloth for cleaning.

(1) Open the left upper cover. Wipe the surface of the slit glasses of the scanner-1 and -2 with a dry
cloth or a cloth which has been wrung out.
(2) Close the left upper cover.

[ 2 ] How to clean the shading sheet


Note:
Be sure to use a soft cloth for cleaning. When cleaning the shading sheet, be careful not to break 7
it by applying strong force.

(1) Close all covers. Perform the self-diagnosis mode 001001-7102. Take off the shading sheet.
(2) Open the left upper cover. Wipe the front and back surfaces of the shading sheet with a dry cloth
or a cloth which has been wrung out.
(3) Close the left upper cover. Perform the self-diagnosis mode 001001-7103. Return the shading
sheet to its home position.

7.4.2 Abnormal noise


If an abnormal noise occurs during paper feeding, clean the feed roller.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 77
7.4.3 Ink printer position
To move the starting position of the ink printer, follow the procedure below.

[ 1 ] Erase mark
The erase marks are printed as follows on paper whose images are erased. To move the starting posi-
tion of the erase mark, follow the procedure below.

Approx. 10mm Paper feeding direction

Approx. 1mm 1st erase mark position

Approx. 11.3mm

2nd erase mark position

Approx. 11.3mm

3rd erase mark position

1.85mm (7dot)

2.54mm
(10dot)

Fig. 7-1

[ 2 ] Checking the erase mark position

(1) Place A4 or LT size paper on the tray. (A4 for EU/AS/AU, LT for NA)
(2) Align the position of the side guides with the paper.
(3) Press [MENU], [UP] and [OK] simultaneously to enter the self-diagnosis mode.
(4) Enter 001001 and press [OK].
(5) Enter [7211] and press [OK]. A sheet of paper is fed, the mark is printed and the paper exits on
the reuse tray.
(6) Repeat step 5 three times and check the mark position on the three sheets output on the reuse
tray.
(7) To adjust the mark position within the range of 0.792 mm in the direction of the paper end and
0.528 mm in the direction of its center, perform the ink nozzle adjustment, to do this beyond the
above range, carry out the ink head adjustment.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 78
[ 3 ] Adjustment of the ink nozzle position

(1) Turn the power OFF.


(2) Remove the ink cartridge. Clean the nozzle plate of the ink cartridge with a non-woven cloth.
Note:
Be sure not to damage the nozzle plate.

(3) Install the ink cartridge and turn the power ON.
(4) Press [MENU], [UP] and [OK] simultaneously to enter the self-diagnosis mode.
(5) Enter 001001 and press [OK].
(6) Enter 2120 and press [OK]. (Default value: 3)
(7) To shift the mark position to the paper center, decrease the value (Enter 1 or 2 and press [OK].) If
the value is decreased by 1, the mark position is shifted by 0.264 mm to the center.
To shift the mark position to the paper end, increase the value (Enter 4, 5 or 6 and press [OK].) If
the value is increased by 1, the mark position is shifted by 0.264 mm to the end.
(8) Press [Home] to return to the home screen.
(9) Check the mark position after the adjustment above “[2] Checking the erase mark position“.

7
Ink nozzle (12dot)
0.264mm 7dot Default

Ink nozzle (10dot)

1
2
Setting value of the self- 3
diagnosis code 2120 4
5
6

Fig. 7-2

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 79
[ 4 ] Adjustment of the ink head position

(1) Do not adjust the ink head position.


Note:
Never loosen or remove the 2 adjustment screws since the ink head position is adjusted at the
factory shipment.

Fig. 7-3

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 80
7.4.4 Adjustment of Erase unit
Normally, the pressure roller does not need to be adjusted. However, this must be carried out when
wrinkles frequently appear after images are erased.

[ 1 ] Pressure roller-1 pressure


<Procedure>

(1) Take off the erase unit.


 P.4-65 "4.6.1 Erase unit"
(2) Take off the inside unit cover.
 P.4-69 "4.6.6 Inside unit cover"
(3) Change the hook position of the pressure roller-1 pressure spring to adjust the pressure.
Note:
When attaching the pressure roller-1 pressure spring, hang the front hook [1] and the rear hook
[2] into the holes at the same position in each front and rear bracket. (e.g.: When the front hook
[1] is hung into the hole "A" in the front bracket, the rear hook [2] has to be hung into the hole "A"
in the rear bracket.).
7

[1] [2]

Fig. 7-4

<Relationship between the spring position and the pressure>


A : The erasing ability is satisfied. (Default)
B : Paper wrinkling is controlled and the erasing ability is retained. (Pressure: Slightly weak)
C : The priority is given to the control of paper wrinkling rather than to the erasing ability.
(Pressure: Weak)

A B C

C
A

B
Fig. 7-5

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 81
e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
ERROR CODE / TROUBLESHOOTING
7 - 82
8. REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/SSD

8.1 Installation and Replacement of PC boards

8.1.1 Board case

(1) Remove the SYS board.


 P.8-1 "8.1.2 SYS control board (SYS
board)"
(2) Remove the SCAN board.
 P.8-2 "8.1.3 Scanner board (SCAN
board)"
(3) Remove the MAIN board.
 P.8-2 "8.1.4 Main board (MAIN board)"
(4) Remove 3 screws and take off the board
case [1].

8
Fig. 8-1

8.1.2 SYS control board (SYS board)

(1) Take off the rear cover.


 P.4-8 "4.1.6 Rear cover"
(2) Take off the upper rear cover.
(3) Disconnect 5 connectors, remove 4 screws
and take off the SYS board [1].

Fig. 8-2

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/SSD
8-1
8.1.3 Scanner board (SCAN board)

(1) Take off the rear cover.


 P.4-8 "4.1.6 Rear cover"
(2) Disconnect 2 flat cables [1] and 3 connectors
[2].
(3) Remove 4 screws and take off the scanner
board [3].

Fig. 8-3

8.1.4 Main board (MAIN board)

(1) Take off the rear cover.


 P.4-8 "4.1.6 Rear cover"
(2) Disconnect 20 connectors.
(3) Remove 1 screw and take off the earth wire
[1].
(4) Remove 3 screws and take off the main
board [2].
Note:
Refer to the setting procedures to replace
the main board.
 P.8-6 "8.2.3 Procedures when replacing
the MAIN board"

Fig. 8-4

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/SSD
8-2
8.1.5 Power supply board (PWR board)

(1) Take off the rear cover.


 P.4-8 "4.1.6 Rear cover"
(2) Disconnect 9 connectors.
(3) Remove 1 screw [1] and take off the ground
wire.
(4) Remove 14 screws and take off the power
supply board [2].

Fig. 8-5

8.1.6 Power supply board case 8

(1) Take off the rear cover.


 P.4-8 "4.1.6 Rear cover"
(2) Disconnect 9 connectors.
Note:
When connecting, be sure to insert the
power supply fan connector in CN513.

(3) Remove 2 harness clamps [1].


(4) Disconnect 4 Faston terminals [2] of the
main switch.
Note:
When connecting, be sure to insert each
Faston terminal of the main switch in accor-
dance with the following instruction.
*See the case from the rear side: Fig. 8-6
Upper: Orange terminal
Lower: White terminal
Front: Black harness
Rear: White harness

(5) Remove 1 screw [3].


(6) Remove each screw and the ground wires
[4] and [4].
(7) Remove the power supply board case [5].
Note:
When removing the power supply board
case, be careful not to catch it on the cable.

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/SSD
8-3
8.1.7 SYS board cooling fan (F4)

(1) Take off the board case.


 P.8-1 "8.1.1 Board case"
(2) Remove 2 screws and take off the SYS
board cooling fan [1].

Fig. 8-7

8.1.8 SSD (SSD)

(1) Take off the rear cover.


 P.4-8 "4.1.6 Rear cover"
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1] and remove 4
screws. Take off the SSD [2].
Note:
Refer to the setting procedures to replace
the SSD.
 P.8-6 "8.2.1 Procedures when replacing
the SSD"

Fig. 8-8

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/SSD
8-4
8.1.9 Power supply fan (F5)

(1) Take off the power supply board case.


 P.8-3 "8.1.6 Power supply board case"
(2) Remove 2 screws and the power supply fan
[1].

Fig. 8-9

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/SSD
8-5
8.2 Precautions and Procedures for Replacing PC Boards and
SSD

8.2.1 Procedures when replacing the SSD

(1) Create a clone file by accessing TopAccess -> [Administration] -> [Maintenance] -> [Create
Clone File].
(2) Enter "8930" in the self-diagnosis mode to restore the factory default settings.
(3) Turn the power OFF.
(4) Replace the SSD.
 P.8-4 "8.1.8 SSD (SSD)"
(5) Turn the power ON.
(6) Update the firmware.
 P.9-1 "9.1 Firmware Updating with USB Device"
(7) When the status screen appears, press the [MENU/OFF], [UP] and [OK] buttons simultaneously
until the self-diagnosis mode screen is displayed (approx. 3 seconds).
(8) Enter "001003" and press the [OK] button.
(9) Enter "9000" and press the [OK] button.
(10) Enter any of the following number for the destination and press the [OK] button.
[0]: MJD, [1]: NAD, [2]: JPD, [3]: ASD, [4]: CND, Default: [2]
(11) Press the [HOME] button to return to the status screen.
(For CND: The screen returns to the status screen even if the [HOME] button is not pressed.)
(12) Install the clone file by accessing TopAccess -> [Administration] -> [Maintenance] -> [Install
Clone File].
(13) Enter "1957" in the self-diagnosis mode to back up the adjustment value of the main board into
the SSD.
Note:
Be sure not to open any covers throughout the above procedures.

8.2.2 Procedures when replacing the SYS board

(1) Turn the power OFF.


(2) Replace the SYS board.
 P.8-1 "8.1.2 SYS control board (SYS board)"
(3) Install DIMM to the new SYS board (from the old SYS board).
(4) Turn the power ON.
(5) Update the firmware.
 P.9-1 "9.1 Firmware Updating with USB Device"

8.2.3 Procedures when replacing the MAIN board

(1) Turn the power OFF.


(2) Replace the MAIN board.
 P.8-2 "8.1.4 Main board (MAIN board)"
(3) Turn the power ON.
(4) Update the firmware.
 P.9-1 "9.1 Firmware Updating with USB Device"
(5) Enter "1958" in the self-diagnosis mode to restore the adjustment value stored in the SSD into
the main board.
(6) Set the time.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/SSD
8-6
Notes:
• When the SSD and the main board are required to be replaced together, exchange the main
board first and do so for the SSD after step 6 is completed.
• When any of the adjustment values of the test numbers 1103 to 5731 is changed, enter
"1957" in the self-diagnosis mode to back up the value into the SSD.
• When the self-diagnostic codes 1955 (saving of the adjustment value list) and 1956 (writing of
the adjustment value list) using a USB device are performed, enter "1957" in the self-diagno-
sis mode to back up the adjustment value into the SSD.

8.2.4 Procedures when replacing the scanner board

(1) Turn the power OFF.


(2) Replace the scanner board.
 P.8-2 "8.1.3 Scanner board (SCAN board)"
(3) Turn the power ON.
(4) Update the firmware.
 P.9-1 "9.1 Firmware Updating with USB Device"

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/SSD
8-7
8.3 Precautions when disposing of the equipment
• When disposing of the equipment, carry out "Factory Default" to restore the equipment to its factory
default status. (Or perform "8930" in the self-diagnosis mode to restore the factory default status.)
Any scanned data remaining in the equipment (SSD) will be erased.
• When card authentication is enabled, be sure to enter "1" into the self-diagnosis modes 3500, 3501,
3502 and 3503 to clear the setting information of the card.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS/SSD
8-8
9. FIRMWARE UPDATING
When you want to update the firmware to the latest one or the equipment becomes inoperable due to
some defect in the firmware, updating can be performed as follows.

9.1 Firmware Updating with USB Device


To update the firmware, store firmware data files in the USB device.
Note:
When performing the update, use the latest program.

9.1.1 Firmware type and data file name for updating

Firmware Stored Data file name


System firmware SSD KH-1020-FWxxxxxxx.tar.gz
Engine firmware Main board (MAIN board) (xxxxxxx is version.)
Scanner firmware Scanner board (SCAN board)
System software SSD

Store the data file for updating in the model specific folder.
Note:
Be sure not to store files or folders whose name begins with "KH-1020-FW" except for the firm- 9
ware data in the model unique folder "KH-1020" of a USB device. If there are such files or fold-
ers, an F104 error occurs when update is performed.

Model specific folder name KH-1020

USB device

KH-1020

KH-1020-FWxxxxxxx.tar.gz

Fig. 9-1

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
FIRMWARE UPDATING
9-1
9.1.2 Precaution for a USB device
Notes:
• Since the date and time set in the equipment are recorded in the firmware update log, make
sure that they are correct before updating the firmware.
• Never change the model specific folder name, since it is used for identifying the data file when
those used for updating multiple models are stored in the USB device.

Important:
• Only a USB device which meets the following conditions should be used for updating. Be
careful since updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed.
- A combination USB device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the USB port)
and its capacity is 1GB or more.
- USB device which complies with the following standards regulated by USB-IF (USB Imple-
menters Forum)
Class number: 8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class)
Sub-class number: 6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number: 80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)
• Most common USB devices comply with the specifications above and can be used for updat-
ing. However, operation in all Multi Functional Digital Color Systems, Multi Functional Digital
Systems and Erase Systems is not necessarily guaranteed since the most of these devices
are developed based on use in a PC environment (Windows or Macintosh). Therefore, first
thoroughly check that the device is operational in the equipment for which the updating will be
performed.
• A USB device complying with USB2.0 can be used for updating.
• Do not update the firmware with any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a
USB connection type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk), since it is never guar-
anteed.
• It is possible to store the model specific update program and the data file for updating directly
in the root directory when you store the updating data file for one specific model in the USB
device. However, if the model specific folder for the same model as that of the data file stored
in the root directory already exists, this will have priority.

e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
FIRMWARE UPDATING
9-2
9.1.3 Update Procedure

[A] Update procedure


Important:
• The file system of the USB device should be formatted in the FAT32 format. Be careful since
the devices formatted in NTFS or other format will not be able to be operated. The file system
can be confirmed on the device properties in applications such as Windows Internet Explore.
• The update operation cannot be canceled during updating, so never shut down the equip-
ment.
• Do not start up another update program during the update.
• Updating cannot be performed when this equipment is operated.
• If rebooting is needed during the update, it can be done automatically, but not manually.
• The cloning data are not overwritten during the process of the system update.

(1) Write the data file of firmware in a USB device.


(2) Connect the USB device to the equipment.

Fig. 9-2

(3) In the normal mode, press the [MENU], [UP] and [OK] buttons simultaneously to enter the self-
diagnosis mode.
(4) Enter "001000" as the authentication code, and then press the [OK] button.
(5) Select [USB Update], and then press the [OK] button.
(6) Confirm the displayed version of firmware, and then press the [OK] button.
(7) Updating starts.
If the USB device is not recognized correctly, updating stops and an error message appears.
(8) When the update is completed properly, the equipment automatically restarts.

[B] Confirmation of the updated data


After the updating is completed, check each data version in the self-diagnosis mode to confirm that the
data were overwritten properly.

Firmware Code Remarks


System firmware 9903 System OS version
Engine firmware 9900 Engine firmware version
Scanner firmware 9902 Scanner firmware version
System software 9904 System software version

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
FIRMWARE UPDATING
9-3
e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301 © 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
FIRMWARE UPDATING
9-4
10. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION

10.1 AC Wire Harness

INLET
CN501
HRNS-INLET-202
A 1
B FG 2
C 3
CN502

MAIN SW CN503
HRNS-MAIN-SW-202
1 3
2 4
3 1
4 2

HEATER
CN506 LVPS
1 1
THMO2 THMO1

CN504

2 1
HTR-LP-1
10

3 2
HRNS-LAMP-202
HTR-LP-2

Fig. 10-1

© 2013, 2014 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO RD30 / RD301
WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION
10 - 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PWA-MAIN

A A

HRNS-MAIN-POW-202 HRNS-FAN-202
HRNS-LAMP-202
CN1 CN511 CN3 CN2
SYS-DN +24V
1 1 CN506 1 FAN1 1 F3
PWR-EN AC-L (LAMP) 2
2 2 Q1 2
PWR-DN
3 3
SG J628 HRNS-SCAN-IF-202
4 4 HRNS-FAN1-202
5VS CN504 1
5 5 AC-N (C-LAMP) CN4 CN13
5VS 1 2 CN3 CN1 CN2
10.2 DC Wire Harness

6 6 12VA +24V +24V


SG AC-N (S-LAMP) 1 1 3 1 1 1 F1
7 7 2 3 12VA FAN2 FAN1
SG 2 2 4 2 2 2
8 8 SG
12VA 3 3 CN4
9 9 SG +24V
12VA 4 4 5 1 F2
10 10 TxD FAN3
12VA 5 5 6 2
11 11 /SCAN-RES
SG 6 6
12 12 /SCAN-ST
SG 7 7 HRNS-INPRT-202 HRNS-SI-202
13 13 HRNS-MAIN-SW-202 SS4
SG 8 8
14 14 SG CN2 CN20
CN503 CN100 9 9 PRT-D1
AC-SW-OUT LIVE RxD 1 1
CN512 1 2 10 10 INPRT PRT-D2
NC (PWR-DN) 11 SCAN-BSY 2 2
15 1 11 PRT-D3
RLY-ON AC-SW-IN LIVE 12 /SCAN-CNT 3 3
16 2 2 1 12 HRNS-THMS-202 PRT-D4 CN15
S LAMP-ON SG HRNS-THMS-HTR1-202 4 4 CN2
17 13 13 PRT-D5 SI1-A
3 SG 5 A1 1 S1
C LAMP-ON AC-SW-OUT NEUTRAL 14 14 CN6 CN2 5 SI1-B
18 4 3 4 PRT-D6 A2 2
NC 15 24VD3 HTRCNT-IN HTRCNT-IN 6 6 SI1-C
5 15 1 13 1 PRT-D7 A3
B NC (12VF) AC-SW-IN NEUTRAL SG THMS1A THMS1A 7 7 3 B
6 4 3 16 16 2 12 2 2 THMS1 PRT-D8
NC (12VF) THMS1B THMS1B 8 8 CN3
7 3 11 3 1 PRT-D9 SI2-A
NC 9 9 A4 1 S2
8 THMS2A PRT-D10 A5 SI2-B
SG THMS2A 2 THMS2 10 10 2
19 9 HRNS-INLET-202 4 10 4 THMS2B PRT-D11 A6 SI2-C
SG THMS2B 1 11 11 3
20 10 5 9 5 PRT-D12
PG 12 12 CN4
21 11 CN501 5VA SI3-A
PG LVPS-Live HRNS-THMS-HTR2-202 13 13 A7 1 S3
22 12 INLET HRNS-SCAN-FFC1-202 SG SI3-B
PG 14 14 A8 2
23 13 CN502 PRT-CNT SI3-C
NC THMS3A THMS3A 4 1 THMS3A 2 15 15 A9 3
LVPS-Neutral T-CN1 6 8 6 THMS3

drawer
14 THMS3B THMS3B NC
NC 1 1 THMS3B 3 2 1 16 16 CN5

connector
15 7 7 7 +24V
NC 17 17 A10 SI8-A
16 FG 2 2 SG 1 S8
NC THMS4A THMS4A 2 3 THMS4A 18 18 A11 SI8-B
17 3 3 8 6 8 2 THMS4 2
24VD1 THMS4B THMS4B 1 4 THMS4B A12 SI8-C
24 18 4 4 9 5 9 1 3
24VD2 SG SG CN6
25 19 CN513 5 5 10 4 10 +9V

PWA-LVPS
24VD3 6 6 /HTRNEW /HTRNEW 2 A13 1
26 20 11 3 11 SI7-B S7
F5 SG SG 1 A14 2
7 7 12 2 12
HTRCNT-OUT HTRCNT-OUT A15 SG
8 8 13 1 13 3
A16 USS-0
9 9 4
A17 SG
10 10 5
HRNS-INTLK-PS-SJ46-202 11 11 HRNS-SI-TOP-202
12 12
CN510 CJ4 CN7 CN1 CN2
+12V-IN (SJ4) 13 13 SI4-A SI4-A
1 1 SW10 B1 15 1 1 S4
14 14 SI4-B SI4-B
15 15 B2 14 2 2
SI4-C SI4-C
HRNS-INTLK-SJ4-SJ5-202 CJ5 16 16 B3 13 3 3
1 SW11 17 17 CN3
SI5-A SI5-A

SCN1(top)
18 18 HRNS-ST-202 HRNS-ST12-MGGR-202 B4 12 4 1 S5
SI5-B SI5-B
C 19 19 B5 11 5 2 C
HRNS-INTLK-SJ5-SJ1-202 CJ1 SI5-C SI5-C
CN18 CN2 CN1 CN3 B6 10 6 3
1 SW7 20 20 ST1-A ST1-A
21 21 A1 1 6 1 S20 SI6-A SI6-A CN4
ST1-B ST1-B
NC A2 2 5 2 B7 9 7 1 S6
2 22 22 ST1-C ST1-C SI6-B SI6-B
HRNS-INTLK-SJ1-SJ2-202 CJ2 A3 3 4 3 B8 8 8 2
23 23 SI6-C SI6-C
1 SW8 B9

PWA-Scanner
24 24 CN4 7 9 3
ST2-A ST2-A
25 25 A4 4 3 1 S21 CN5
ST2-B ST2-B SI9-A SI9-A
HRNS-INTLK-SJ2-SJ3-202 CJ3 26 26 A5 5 2 2 B10 6 10 1 S9
ST2-C ST2-C SI9-B SI9-B
1 SW9 27 27 A6 6 1 3 B11 5 11 2
SI9-C SI9-C
28 28 B12 4 12 3
NC
HRNS-INTLK-SJ3-SJ6-202 29 29 B13
CJ6 NC
HRNS-ST348-202 B14 CN6
1 SW12 30 30 USS+ USS+
+12V-OUT (SJ6) B15 3 13 1 S7
3 SG SG
CN3 CN1 CN2 B16 2 14 2
ST3-A ST3-A USS- USS-
A7 1 9 ST3-B 1 S22 B17 1 15 3
ST3-B
A8 2 8 2
ST3-C ST3-C HRNS-MTIFIRIP-202
A9 3 7 3
CN3 CN22 CN2
HRNS-SCAN-FFC2-202 ST4-A B
A10 ST4-A 4 6 1 S23 1 3
ST4-B B# M1
D-CN1 A11 ST4-B 5 5 2 2 1
ST4-C A# M
1 1 A12 ST4-C 6 4 3 3 6
A
2 2 CN4 4 4
ST8-A ST8-A
3 3 B10 7 3 1 S26 CN3
ST8-B ST8-B B
4 4 B11 8 2 2 5 3 M2
ST8-C ST8-C B#
5 5 B12 9 1 3 6 1
A# M
6 6 7 6
CN4 A
7 7 ST5-A 8 4
D 8 8
B1
ST5-B
1 S24
HRNS-SI-TOP-202
D
B2 2
9 9 ST5-C
B3 3
10 10 CN4 CN7 CN8
11 11 MTIP+ MTIP+
CN5 9 2 1 1 M3
12 12 ST6-A MTIP- MTIP-
B4 1 S25 10 1 2 2 M
13 13 ST6-B
B5 2
CN1 14 14 ST6-C
B6 3
15 15
M6 16 16 CN6
17 17 ST7-A
M B7 1 S27
ST7-B

SCN2(bottom)
18 18 B8 2
19 19 ST7-C
B9 3
20 20 HRNS-SH-202
21 21 CN2 CN17
22 22 1 SH1-A 1
S14

10 - 2
23 23 2 SH1-B 2
(USB) 24 24 3 SH1-C 3 HRNS-SS-202 HRNS-SS1-202
HRNS-MTTFTA-MGGR-202
SCANNER 25 25
CN3
VCC 26 26 CN21 CN2 1 SH2-A 4 CN2 CN1 CN2
1 B S15 CN16 SS1-A SS1-A
-DATA 27 27 1 3 2 SH2-B 5 3 1 1 S10
2 B# M8 1 SS1-B SS1-B
+DATA 28 28 2 1 3 SH2-C 6 2 SS1-C 2 2 2
3 A# SS1-C
SG 29 29 3 6 M CN4 3 1 3 3
4 30 30 A
DRAIN 4 4 S16 1 SH3-A 7 HRNS-SS23-202
5
CN3 2 SH3-B 8
MTTS+ SH3-C CN3 CN1 CN2
5 1 M9 3 9 SS2-A SS2-A
MTTS- M 4 6 1 1 S11
6 2 SS2-B SS2-B
HRNS-SH45-202 5 5 2 2
E CN4 CN2 CN5 SS2-C SS2-C E
24VD3 24VD3 6 4 3 3
7 2 1 2 CN2 CN1 CN5
MGGR-SET MGGR-SET MGGR CN3
8 1 2 1 SH4-A 1 6 SH4-A 10
S17 1 SS3-A SS3-A
SH4-C SH4-C 7 3 4 1 S12
3 2 5 11 SS3-B SS3-B
SH4-B SH4-B 8 2 5 2
2 3 4 12 SS3-C SS3-C
HRNS-ST12-MGGR-202 9 1 6 3
HRNS-SYS-POW-202 CN3
SH5-A SH5-A CN4
S18 1 4 3 13 SS4-A
SH5-B SH5-B 10 1 S13
CN5 CN12 2 5 2 14 SS4-B
3.3VA SH5-C SH5-C 11 2
1 1 3 6 1 15 SS4-C
3.3VA (NC) 12 3
2 CN6
SG SH6-A
3 3 S19 1 16
5VA SH6-B
4 6 2 17
SG HRNS-SJ-202 SH6-C
5 5 3 18
5VA
6 7
SG (NC) CN19 A CN3
7 SJ1-A SJ1-A
PWR-OK 1 1 2 1 SW1
8 10
5VS CN4
9 11 SJ1-B SJ1-A
12VA (NC) 2 2 1 1
10
12VA CN3
HRNS-SYS-USB-202 11 14 SJ2-A
3.3VA (NC) 3 1 SW2
12 SJ2-B
3.3VA 2 HRNS-MTHF-HTECL-202
13 2 4
-12VA
14 16 CN4 CN2 CN14
SG SJ3-A MTHF-BK
15 9 5 1 SW3
/PS-ON SJ3-B M7 10 1
16 4 6 2 24VD1
SG 9 2
17 12 CN5 24VD1
SG (NC) SJ4-A 8 3
18 7 1 SW4 PG
SG SJ4-B 7 4
19 13 8 2 PG
F NC 6 5 F
20 CN6 M NC
HRNS-PANEL-IF-202 (USB) 5VA SJ5-A 5 6
21 8 9 1 SW5 MTHF-PLL
SYS 5VA (NC) SJ5-B 4 7
CN9 CN2 22 10 2 MTHF-DIR
3.3VS 5VA (NC) 3 8
1 1 1 23 CN7 MTHF-CK
SG SG SJ6-A 2 9
2 2 2 24 15 11 1 SW6 MTHF-ON
5VS SJ6-B 1 10
3 3 3 12 2 NC
SG 4 NC 11
4 4 13 NC
Main Power ON 5 NC 12
5 5 14 NC
SW Reset CN3 13
6 6 24VD1 HRNS-MTSFADJ-MGGH-202
3.3VA CN7 HTECL 2 14
7 7 HTECL-OUT CN2
SG VCC 1 15 CN2
8 8 1 6 B
5VA -DATA 1 3
9 9 2 7 B# M4
SG +DATA 2 1
10 10 3 8 A# M
Reserve SG 3 6
11 11 4 9 A
Reserve DRAIN 4 4
12 12 6 10
NC CN3
5 CN3 HRNS-SYS-IF-202 B
5 3
B# M5
CN11 6 1

PWA-System
CN4 A#
NC 7 6 M
2 A
RXD 8 4

PWA-Panel
1 2
TXD CN4
4 1 24VD3
NC 9 3
HRNS-CBRY-PANEL-LED-202 3 MGGH-SET SOL1
NC 10 2
6 3 MGGH-RES
CN3 CN2 LED PCB NC 11 1
5
1 1 NC
8
2 2 NC
7
3 3 NC
10
NC KeyPin
G 9 G
CN5
NC
2
NC
1
NC
4
NC
3
NC
6
POWER-SW
5 4
NC
8
NC
7 5
NC
10
NC KeyPin
9
HRNS-HDD-202

(SYS) (HDD) (HDD) (SYS)


SIGNAL SIGNAL POWER POWER
NC NC
1 1 1
DATA A+ NC
2 2 2
DATA A- NC
3 3 3
NC NC
4 4 4
DATA B+ NC
5 5 5 3
DATA B- NC
6 6 6
NC +5V
7 7 7
+5V
CN1 8 4

SSD
+5V
9
NC
10
H NC H
11 2
NC
12
NC
13
NC
14
NC
15
CN10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
REVISION RECORD
Ver.04
Ver.04 <2014.11.27>
Page Contents
Cover Model names have been added
Precaution The description of the note has been added.
1-1 The specifications has been corrected.
3-18 The functions has been corrected.
4-17 The note has been added.
4-19 to 4-22 The illustration has been changed.
4-66 to 4-83 The disassembly procedure of the erase unit has been changed.
4-84 The illustration has been changed.
4-86 The illustration has been changed.
4-88 A note has been added.
4-93 The illustration has been changed.
4-99 to 4-100 The disassembly procedure of the motor (M9) has been changed.
4-101 to 4-103 The disassembly procedure of the sensor (S24) has been changed.
4-126 The disassembly procedure of the Ink printer unit has been deleted.
4-127 A note has been added.
5-4 The test numbers 5001 and 5002 have been deleted.
5-8 The descriptions have been added.
5-9 Adjustment test codes 1109, 1123, 1124 and 1125 have been added.
5-10 Adjustment test codes 1126, 1133, 1134 and 1135 have been added.
5-11 Adjustment test codes 1136, 1143, 1144 and 1145 have been added.
5-12 Adjustment test code 1146 has been added.
5-13 to 5-14 The descriptions have been added.
5-15 A note has been added.
5-16 The descriptions have been changed.
5-18 Adjustment test codes 6573, 6574 and 6575 have been added.
5-20 Setting test code 6262 has been added.
5-22 Setting test code 9283 has been added.
5-23 Log output / adjustment value saving mode for the test codes 1957 and 1958 have been
added.
7-10 Error code 2D32 has been deleted.
7-11 Error code F104 has been deleted. Error code change 7166 to 7183.
Error codes 6032, 6033, 6034 and 6037 have been deleted.
7-49 A troubleshooting for the error code C421 has been changed.
7-50 to 7-51 A troubleshooting for the error code C423 has been changed.
7-52 A troubleshooting for the error code C513 has been deleted.
7-54 A troubleshooting for the error codes CB10 and CB11 have been added.
7-58 A troubleshooting for the error code 2D32 has been deleted.
7-68 A troubleshooting for the error code F104 has been deleted.
7-70 A troubleshooting for the error codes 6032, 6033, 6034 and 6037 have been deleted.
7-80 The descriptions of "7.4.3 Ink printer position" have been changed.
7-81 The descriptions of "7.4.4 Adjustment of Erase unit" have been added.
8-4 A note has been added.
8-6 The descriptions of "8.2 Precautions and Procedures for Replacing PC Boards and SSD"
have been changed.
Ver.04 <2014.11.27>
Page Contents
8-7 A note has been added.
Ver.03
Ver.03 <2014.06.30>
Page Contents
7-10 Error codes 2D34, 2D35, 2D36, 2D37 and 2D38 have been added.
7-57 A troubleshooting for the error code 2D34 havs been added.
7-58 A troubleshooting for the error code 2D35, 2D36, 2D37 and 2D38 have been added.
7-60 The description of the remark has been added.
Ver.02
Ver.02 <2014.04.23>
Page Contents
Precaution The description of the note has been changed.
2-6 The illustration has been corrected.
2-8 "P-I" information has been added.
2-9 "P-I" information has been added.
2-10 "P-I" information has been added.
2-11 "P-I" information has been added.
2-12 "P-I" information has been added.
5-1 Procedures have been added to "[A] Starting self-diagnosis mode".
5-8 Adjustment test codes 1103, 1104, 1105 and 1106 have been added.
5-9 Adjustment test codes 2100 and 2101 have been added.
5-10 Adjustment test coess 2102 and 2110 have been added.
5-11 Adjustment test codes 2111 and 2112 have been added.
5-12 An adjustment test code 2113 has been added.
5-13 The description for the code 5700 has been changed.
5-14 The descriptions for the codes 3500 and 3504 have been changed.
5-15 A code 3734 has been added.
The description for the code 3807 have been corrected.
5-16 A description for the code 7120 has been added.
A code 8758 has been added.
A default value for the code 8941 has been added.
5-17 A default value for the code 9281 has been added.
5-18 A code 1950 has been added.
7-4 Alert codes A200, A404, A405 and A910 have been added.
The alert code A300 has been deleted.
7-7 An Error code E700 has been added.
7-9 Error codes C513, C514, C930 and C950 have been added.
7-11 The error codes F124, F130, F131, F500 and F510 have been deleted.
7-20 A troubleshooting for the alert code A404 has been added.
A troubleshooting for the alert code A405 has been added.
7-22 The test No. has been corrected.
7-47 The test No. has been corrected.
7-48 The test No. has been corrected.
7-49 The test No. has been corrected.
7-50 The test No. has been corrected.
7-51 A troubleshooting for the error code C513 has been added.
7-52 A troubleshooting for the error code C514 has been added.
Ver.02 <2014.04.23>
Page Contents
7-53 A troubleshooting for the error code C930 has been added.
7-62 The test No. has been corrected.
7-65 The troubleshooting for the error codes F124, F130, F131, F500 and F510 has been
deleted.
8-1 The contents of "4.8 PC Board" have been moved to "8.1 Installation and Replacement of
PC boards".
8-6 The contents of "8 REPLACEMENT OF SSD/PC BOARDS" have been moved to "8.2 Pre-
cautions and Procedures for Replacing PC Boards and SSD".
Procedures have been added to "8.1 Procedures when replacing the SSD".
8-8 "8.3 Precautions when Disposing of the Equipment" has been added.
9-1 The data file name of the firmware has been changed.
10-2 The connector No. has been corrected.

Ver.01
Ver.01 <2013.07.31>
Page Contents
- "3. General operations" has been added.
5-12 The part name has been unified to "Erase unit".
6-1 "6. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)" has been added.
7-2 "7.1.2 Collection of debug logs with a USB device" has been added.
7-8 The contents of C420 and C422 have been changed.
7-47 The descriptions of the C420 troubleshooting have been changed.
7-48 The descriptions of the C422 troubleshooting have been changed.
7-73 The descriptions of "7.4.3 Ink printer position" have been changed.
9-1 "Note" has been added.
1-11-1, OSAKI, SHINAGAWA-KU, TOKYO, 141-8562, JAPAN